GE

Grid Solutions

R650 Recloser Controller

Instruction Manual
Firmware version: 8.0X
EnerVista 650 Setup version: 8.0x
GE publication code:1601-0707-A3 (GEK-131023B)

*1601-0707-A3*
© 2018 GE Multilin Inc. All rights reserved.
GE Multilin R650 Feeder Protection System instruction manual for revision GEK-131023B.

R650 Recloser Controller, EnerVista, and EnerVista 650 family Setup are registered
trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
Viper-ST is a registered trademark of G&W Electric Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc.
This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the permission of GE Multilin. The content of this manual is for informational use
only and is subject to change without notice.

Part number: GEK-131023B (April 2018)

GE
Grid Solutions

R650 Recloser Controller

Table of Contents

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 Important procedures ..................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Cautions and warnings ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1.1 General cautions and warnings.................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1.2 Communication board withdrawal/insertion......................................................................1-4
1.1.1.3 Magnetic module terminals.........................................................................................................1-5
1.1.2 Inspection checklist............................................................................................................... 1-6
1.1.3 Safety instructions................................................................................................................. 1-9
1.1.3.1 General safety instructions....................................................................................................... 1-10
1.1.3.2 Warning symbols........................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2 Overview .......................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.1 Introduction to the 650 family of relays....................................................................1-12
1.2.2 Hardware architecture ......................................................................................................1-12
1.2.2.1 R650 basic design.......................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.2.2 R650 signal type............................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.2.3 Communications architecture .......................................................................................1-13
1.3 EnerVista 650 Setup software ...................................................................... 1-15
1.3.1 System requirements.........................................................................................................1-15
1.3.2 Installation...............................................................................................................................1-15
1.3.3 Connecting EnerVista 650 Setup to the R650.........................................................1-19
1.3.3.1 Configuring an Ethernet connection .................................................................................... 1-19
1.3.3.2 Configuring the USB connection ............................................................................................ 1-19
1.4 650 hardware .................................................................................................. 1-20
1.4.1 Mounting & wiring................................................................................................................1-20
1.4.2 650 communications..........................................................................................................1-20
1.4.3 Faceplate display .................................................................................................................1-21
1.4.4 Maintenance...........................................................................................................................1-22
1.4.4.1 General maintenance .................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.4.4.2 In-service maintenance.............................................................................................................. 1-22
1.4.4.3 Out-of-service maintenance .................................................................................................... 1-22
1.4.4.4 Unscheduled maintenance....................................................................................................... 1-22
1.4.5 Storage......................................................................................................................................1-22
1.4.6 Repairs.......................................................................................................................................1-23
1.4.7 Disposal.....................................................................................................................................1-23

2 PRODUCT 2.1 R650 Overview .................................................................................................. 2-1

DESCRIPTION 2.2 ANSI device numbers and functions ............................................................. 2-3

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-1

 CHAPTER 1:

2.3 Other device functions .................................................................................... 2-4

2.4 Order codes ....................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.1 CIO Modules ..............................................................................................................................2-6
2.5 Technical specifications .................................................................................. 2-7
2.5.1 Protection ...................................................................................................................................2-7
2.5.2 Control....................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.5.3 Recloser Settings.................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.5.4 Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.5.5 User-programmable .......................................................................................................... 2-19
2.5.6 Metering ................................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.5.7 Inputs......................................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.5.8 Real time clock ...................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.5.9 Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.5.10 Control power supply ........................................................................................................ 2-24
2.5.11 Communications.................................................................................................................. 2-24
2.5.12 Optical ....................................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.5.13 Environmental ....................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.5.14 Packaging and weight....................................................................................................... 2-27
2.5.15 Type tests ................................................................................................................................ 2-27
2.5.16 Approvals.................................................................................................................................2-28
2.6 External connections .....................................................................................2-29

3 HARDWARE 3.1 Module description........................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Power supply ..................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Driving electronics board ............................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Configurable digital inputs .................................................................................................3-5
3.3.1.1 Wet connection ................................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.3.1.2 Dry connection .................................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.4 Mechanical description ................................................................................... 3-7
3.4.1 Mounting.....................................................................................................................................3-7
3.4.2 Rear description ................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.5 Wiring ...............................................................................................................3-13
3.5.1 External connections.......................................................................................................... 3-13
3.5.2 Digital inputs with trip circuit supervision ................................................................ 3-13
3.6 Transceiver optical power budget vs. link length ....................................3-14

4 INTERFACES, 4.1 EnerVista 650 Setup software ........................................................................ 4-1

SETTINGS & ACTUAL 4.1.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................4-1
VALUES 4.1.1.1 Using settings files ........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.2 Viewing actual values..................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.3 Viewing triggered events .............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.1.4 Firmware upgrades ......................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.5 One line diagrams ............................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.2 Main screen ...............................................................................................................................4-3
4.1.3 Connect to the relay..............................................................................................................4-4
4.1.3.1 Computer Settings: .......................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.3.2 Communication Control: ............................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.3.3 Communication Optimization:.................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 File management menu ......................................................................................................4-6
4.1.4.1 Offline mode........................................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.1.4.2 Online mode........................................................................................................................................ 4-8
4.1.5 EnerVista 650 Setup menu.............................................................................................. 4-10
4.1.6 File menu .................................................................................................................................4-11
4.1.6.1 New, Open, Save, Save as, and Close ..................................................................................4-12
4.1.6.2 Configuration file converter.......................................................................................................4-13

1-2 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1:

4.1.6.3 Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14

4.1.6.4 Print options ..................................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.1.6.5 Compare to settings file.............................................................................................................. 4-15
4.1.6.6 PLC checksum calculation......................................................................................................... 4-15
4.1.6.7 Setting checksum calculation.................................................................................................. 4-16
4.1.7 Setpoint menu .......................................................................................................................4-16
4.1.7.1 Product setup menu..................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.1.7.2 System setup menu...................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.1.7.3 Protection elements menu ........................................................................................................ 4-18
4.1.7.4 Control elements menu .............................................................................................................. 4-19
4.1.7.5 Inputs/Outputs menu................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.1.7.6 Quick settings menu..................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.1.7.7 Quick Reclose / Autoreclose settings menu...................................................................... 4-21
4.1.7.8 Relay configuration menu......................................................................................................... 4-21
4.1.7.9 Logic Configuration menu ......................................................................................................... 4-23
4.1.7.10 IEC 103 Configuration menu ................................................................................................... 4-24
4.1.7.11 Clock menu ....................................................................................................................................... 4-24
4.1.8 Actual values menu.............................................................................................................4-25
4.1.8.1 Front panel........................................................................................................................................ 4-25
4.1.8.2 Status................................................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.1.8.3 Metering ............................................................................................................................................. 4-26
4.1.8.4 Inputs/Outputs menu................................................................................................................... 4-26
4.1.8.5 Records menu ................................................................................................................................. 4-27
4.1.9 Operations menu..................................................................................................................4-28
4.1.10 Communications menu.....................................................................................................4-28
4.1.11 Security menu........................................................................................................................4-30
4.1.12 View menu...............................................................................................................................4-30
4.1.13 Help menu ...............................................................................................................................4-30
4.2 Human-machine interface (HMI) ................................................................ 4-31
4.2.1 Display.......................................................................................................................................4-31
4.2.2 LED indicators ........................................................................................................................4-32
4.2.3 Pushbuttons............................................................................................................................4-32
4.2.3.1 Keypad................................................................................................................................................ 4-32
4.2.3.2 Command push button............................................................................................................... 4-33
4.2.4 Screen contrast.....................................................................................................................4-33
4.2.5 Text menus..............................................................................................................................4-33
4.2.5.1 Navigation......................................................................................................................................... 4-33
4.2.5.2 Text menu hierarchy .................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.2.5.3 Actual Values ................................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.2.5.4 Snapshot events............................................................................................................................. 4-37
4.2.5.5 Fault report ....................................................................................................................................... 4-38
4.2.5.6 View settings menu....................................................................................................................... 4-39
4.2.5.7 Change Settings ............................................................................................................................. 4-42
4.2.5.8 Date & time....................................................................................................................................... 4-43
4.2.5.9 Commands........................................................................................................................................ 4-44
4.2.5.10 Passwords ......................................................................................................................................... 4-45
4.2.5.11 Select main screen........................................................................................................................ 4-47
4.2.5.12 Select language.............................................................................................................................. 4-47
4.2.6 Graphic display .....................................................................................................................4-48
4.2.6.1 One-line diagram........................................................................................................................... 4-48
4.2.6.2 Metering screen.............................................................................................................................. 4-49
4.2.6.3 All events screen ............................................................................................................................ 4-50
4.2.6.4 New events screen........................................................................................................................ 4-52
4.2.6.5 Alarms panel .................................................................................................................................... 4-52
4.2.6.6 Input/output monitoring screen ............................................................................................. 4-53
4.3 Web server...................................................................................................... 4-56
4.3.1 Home..........................................................................................................................................4-56
4.3.2 Snapshot events ...................................................................................................................4-57
4.3.3 Control events........................................................................................................................4-58

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-3

 CHAPTER 1:

4.3.4 Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 4-59

4.3.5 Oscillography......................................................................................................................... 4-60
4.3.6 Fault report ............................................................................................................................. 4-61
4.3.7 Data logger............................................................................................................................. 4-62

5 SETPOINTS 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1.1 Setpoint main menu ..............................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Product setup .................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Communication settings .....................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1.1 Serial ports........................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1.2 Network (Ethernet) ........................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1.3 MODBUS protocol............................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.2.1.4 DNP3 slave........................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.1.5 IEC 60870-5-104 ............................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.1.6 SNTP......................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.2.1.7 IEC 870-5-103 protocol settings..............................................................................................5-11
5.2.1.8 PTP IEEE 1588 protocol settings ..............................................................................................5-11
5.2.1.9 Routing ................................................................................................................................................5-13
5.2.1.10 IEC 60870-5-101 .............................................................................................................................5-16
5.2.2 MODBUS user map settings............................................................................................ 5-17
5.2.3 Fault report settings ........................................................................................................... 5-17
5.2.3.1 Fault report settings......................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.3.2 Fault report retrieval .....................................................................................................................5-18
5.2.4 Oscillography settings....................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.4.1 Oscillography settings .................................................................................................................5-19
5.2.4.2 Oscillography states .....................................................................................................................5-20
5.2.4.3 Oscillography file retrieval .........................................................................................................5-21
5.2.5 Data logger settings ........................................................................................................... 5-22
5.2.5.1 Data logger settings......................................................................................................................5-22
5.2.5.2 Data logger associated states .................................................................................................5-22
5.2.5.3 Data logger file format and retrieval.....................................................................................5-23
5.2.6 Demand settings.................................................................................................................. 5-23
5.2.6.1 Metering values and settings....................................................................................................5-23
5.2.6.2 Demand calculation methods..................................................................................................5-24
5.2.6.3 Demand function measurements and states...................................................................5-27
5.2.7 Time Settings.......................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.2.8 Configurable Event Settings ........................................................................................... 5-30
5.3 System setup ...................................................................................................5-31
5.3.1 General settings ................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.3.2 Source and Load Voltage Sensing............................................................................... 5-32
5.3.3 Current Sensing .................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.3.4 FlexCurve settings ............................................................................................................... 5-33
5.3.5 Recloser.................................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.3.5.1 Recloser settings.............................................................................................................................5-35
5.3.5.2 Single-pole and three-pole settings ......................................................................................5-43
5.3.5.3 Single-pole and three-pole operands...................................................................................5-45
5.3.5.4 Trip operands ...................................................................................................................................5-45
5.3.5.5 Close operands................................................................................................................................5-45
5.3.5.6 Trip states...........................................................................................................................................5-49
5.3.5.7 Close states .......................................................................................................................................5-49
5.3.6 Switchgear settings ............................................................................................................ 5-50
5.3.7 Miscellaneous settings ...................................................................................................... 5-52
5.3.7.1 Out of service setting...................................................................................................................5-52
5.3.7.2 Local - remote block setting......................................................................................................5-53
5.4 Protection elements.......................................................................................5-54
5.4.1 Setting Groups....................................................................................................................... 5-54
5.4.1.1 Single setting group .....................................................................................................................5-55
5.4.1.2 Multiple setting groups ................................................................................................................5-56

1-4 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1:

5.4.2 Inverse time curve characteristics...............................................................................5-58

5.4.2.1 IEEE curves....................................................................................................................................... 5-58
5.4.2.2 IEC curves......................................................................................................................................... 5-60
5.4.2.3 IAC curves......................................................................................................................................... 5-61
5.4.2.4 ANSI curves....................................................................................................................................... 5-62
5.4.2.5 I2t curves .......................................................................................................................................... 5-64
5.4.2.6 Definite time curves...................................................................................................................... 5-64
5.4.2.7 Rectifier time curves..................................................................................................................... 5-64
5.4.2.8 User curves - FlexCurves A/B/C/D ......................................................................................... 5-65
5.4.3 Phase current.........................................................................................................................5-66
5.4.3.1 Phase time delayed overcurrent elements – phase high/low (51PH/51PL)....... 5-66
5.4.3.2 Phase instantaneous overcurrent element- phase high/low (50PH/ 50PL) ....... 5-69
5.4.3.3 Phase directional element (67P).............................................................................................. 5-71
5.4.3.4 Thermal model element (49)..................................................................................................... 5-76
5.4.4 Neutral current......................................................................................................................5-77
5.4.4.1 Neutral time-delayed overcurrent element (51N).......................................................... 5-77
5.4.4.2 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element (50N) ........................................................ 5-77
5.4.4.3 Neutral directional element (67N) .......................................................................................... 5-79
5.4.4.4 Voltage polarization operation principles .......................................................................... 5-80
5.4.4.5 Current polarization operation principles: ......................................................................... 5-82
5.4.5 Ground current......................................................................................................................5-83
5.4.5.1 Ground time-delayed overcurrent element (51G).......................................................... 5-83
5.4.5.2 Ground instantaneous overcurrent element (50G)........................................................ 5-84
5.4.5.3 Ground directional element (67G) .......................................................................................... 5-84
5.4.6 Sensitive ground current ..................................................................................................5-86
5.4.6.1 Sensitive ground time-delayed overcurrent element (51SG).................................... 5-86
5.4.6.2 Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element (50SG).................................. 5-87
5.4.6.3 Instantaneous overcurrent element for ungrounded systems (50IG) .................. 5-87
5.4.6.4 Sensitive ground directional element (67SG) .................................................................... 5-88
5.4.7 Negative sequence current.............................................................................................5-90
5.4.7.1 Negative sequence overcurrent element (46P) ............................................................... 5-90
5.4.8 Voltage elements..................................................................................................................5-91
5.4.8.1 Phase undervoltage element (27P)........................................................................................ 5-92
5.4.8.2 Phase overvoltage element (59P)........................................................................................... 5-93
5.4.8.3 Neutral overvoltage element (59N) ....................................................................................... 5-93
5.4.8.4 Negative sequence overvoltage element (47).................................................................. 5-94
5.4.9 Power elements ....................................................................................................................5-94
5.4.9.1 Forward power element (32FP) ............................................................................................... 5-94
5.4.9.2 Directional power element (32) ............................................................................................... 5-95
5.4.9.3 Wattmetric ground fault (32N)...............................................................................................5-101
5.4.10 Frequency elements ........................................................................................................5-105
5.4.10.1 Underfrequency element (81U).............................................................................................5-105
5.4.10.2 Overfrequency element (81O)................................................................................................5-106
5.4.11 Miscellaneous elements.................................................................................................5-107
5.4.11.1 Broken conductor ........................................................................................................................5-107
5.5 Control elements ..........................................................................................5-108
5.5.1 Setting group.......................................................................................................................5-108
5.5.2 Synchronism check element - Synchrocheck (25) ............................................5-109
5.5.2.1 Voltage inputs................................................................................................................................5-109
5.5.2.2 Settings.............................................................................................................................................5-110
5.5.2.3 Synchrocheck states..................................................................................................................5-112
5.5.2.4 Algorithm .........................................................................................................................................5-113
5.5.3 Autoreclose (79)..................................................................................................................5-116
5.5.3.1 Autoreclose functional description......................................................................................5-116
5.5.3.2 Main autoreclose settings .......................................................................................................5-122
5.5.3.3 Autoreclose inputs.......................................................................................................................5-123
5.5.3.4 Autoreclose internal status .....................................................................................................5-124
5.5.3.5 General autoreclose status.....................................................................................................5-125
5.5.3.6 Logic for blocking protection functions during reclose cycle.................................5-126
5.5.4 Breaker failure element (50BF)....................................................................................5-128

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-5

 CHAPTER 1:

5.5.4.1 Initiation stage ..............................................................................................................................5-128

5.5.4.2 Determination of a recloser failure condition ................................................................5-128
5.5.5 VT fuse failure element (VTFF) ..................................................................................... 5-134
5.5.5.1 Fuse failure algorithm ...............................................................................................................5-134
5.5.6 Pulse counters.................................................................................................................... 5-135
5.5.7 Analog comparators ....................................................................................................... 5-136
5.5.8 Digital counters.................................................................................................................. 5-138
5.5.9 Cold load pickup................................................................................................................ 5-140
5.5.10 60 CTS failure ...................................................................................................................... 5-141
5.5.11 Second harmonic inhibit................................................................................................ 5-143
5.6 Inputs/outputs ..............................................................................................5-146
5.6.1 Input/output placement ................................................................................................ 5-146
5.6.2 Control settings for input/output............................................................................... 5-147
5.6.3 Inputs...................................................................................................................................... 5-150
5.6.4 Outputs .................................................................................................................................. 5-152
5.6.4.1 Output status signals.................................................................................................................5-152
5.6.5 Circuit supervision and contact seal-in circuits ................................................. 5-153
5.6.6 Digital inputs ....................................................................................................................... 5-154
5.6.6.1 With trip circuit supervision ....................................................................................................5-154
5.6.6.2 Without supervision ...................................................................................................................5-155
5.6.6.3 With current supervision (with SEAL-IN) ...........................................................................5-156
5.6.6.4 With simple voltage supervision ..........................................................................................5-157
5.6.6.5 With double voltage supervision..........................................................................................5-160
5.6.6.6 With double voltage supervision and serial resistor in voltage monitors.........5-162
5.6.7 Analog board specific settings ................................................................................... 5-163
5.6.8 Virtual inputs ....................................................................................................................... 5-163
5.6.8.1 Virtual inputs writing..................................................................................................................5-163
5.6.8.2 Virtual inputs status monitoring:..........................................................................................5-164
5.6.9 Virtual outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-164
5.6.10 Virtual outputs latched................................................................................................... 5-164
5.7 Remote comms .............................................................................................5-165
5.8 Testing ............................................................................................................5-166
5.8.1 Force IO–input testing .................................................................................................... 5-166
5.8.2 Force IO–output testing ................................................................................................. 5-166
5.9 Relay configuration......................................................................................5-167
5.9.1 Outputs .................................................................................................................................. 5-167
5.9.2 LEDs......................................................................................................................................... 5-168
5.9.3 Operations............................................................................................................................ 5-169
5.9.3.1 Programming an operation....................................................................................................5-171
5.9.4 Protection elements......................................................................................................... 5-172
5.9.5 Control elements tab....................................................................................................... 5-173
5.9.6 Oscillography...................................................................................................................... 5-174
5.9.7 Control events .................................................................................................................... 5-175
5.9.8 Switchgear ........................................................................................................................... 5-176
5.9.9 HMI (human-machine interface)................................................................................ 5-178
5.9.10 Device display selection ................................................................................................ 5-183
5.9.10.1 Type of graphical display ........................................................................................................5-183
5.10 Logic configuration (PLC editor).................................................................5-184
5.10.1 Theory of operation......................................................................................................... 5-184
5.10.1.1 Description......................................................................................................................................5-184
5.10.1.2 Logic compilation ........................................................................................................................5-188
5.10.2 Main menu ........................................................................................................................... 5-189
5.10.3 Configuration generation.............................................................................................. 5-190
5.10.3.1 Create new project .....................................................................................................................5-190
5.10.3.2 Create equation ...........................................................................................................................5-190
5.10.3.3 Add input to automation..........................................................................................................5-190
5.10.3.4 Add output to automation ......................................................................................................5-191

1-6 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1:

5.10.3.5 Add digital operation..................................................................................................................5-191

5.10.3.6 Link inputs, outputs, and operations ..................................................................................5-191
5.10.3.7 Add library.......................................................................................................................................5-191
5.10.4 Library generation............................................................................................................5-191
5.10.4.1 Library example ...........................................................................................................................5-192
5.10.5 Application example ........................................................................................................5-193
5.11 IEC 60870-5-103 configuration ..................................................................5-194

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 Front panel ........................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1.1 LEDs .............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Status.................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1 Operation bits status ............................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.2 Recloser ...................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2.1 Recloser Status ..................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.2.2 Single-Three Pole ..............................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.3 Protection status .................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.3.1 Protection blocks...............................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.3.2 Phase current .....................................................................................................................................6-5
6.2.3.3 Neutral current...................................................................................................................................6-5
6.2.3.4 Ground current ..................................................................................................................................6-6
6.2.3.5 Sensitive ground current...............................................................................................................6-6
6.2.3.6 Negative sequence current..........................................................................................................6-6
6.2.3.7 Thermal model ...................................................................................................................................6-7
6.2.3.8 Source Voltage...................................................................................................................................6-7
6.2.3.9 Load Voltage .......................................................................................................................................6-8
6.2.3.10 Power ....................................................................................................................................................6-9
6.2.3.11 Frequency ......................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.3.12 Broken conductor .......................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.4 Control element status ......................................................................................................6-11
6.2.4.1 Synchrocheck.................................................................................................................................. 6-11
6.2.4.2 Autoreclose....................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.4.3 Breaker failure................................................................................................................................. 6-14
6.2.4.4 VT fuse failure .................................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.2.4.5 Setting groups ................................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.2.4.6 Pulse counters................................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.2.4.7 Analog comparators .................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.4.8 Digital counters............................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.4.9 Cold load pickup............................................................................................................................. 6-17
6.2.4.10 60CTS Failure ................................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.2.4.11 2nd Harmonic Inhibit ................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.2.5 Protection & control status summary ........................................................................6-18
6.2.6 Snapshot event summary................................................................................................6-18
6.2.7 MODBUS user map ..............................................................................................................6-18
6.2.8 Switchgear status ................................................................................................................6-18
6.2.9 FlexCurves ...............................................................................................................................6-20
6.2.10 System info .............................................................................................................................6-20
6.2.10.1 Device Status ................................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.10.2 HW Versions ..................................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.10.3 FW Versions...................................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.2.10.4 Unit Information ............................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.2.10.5 Configuration Information......................................................................................................... 6-21
6.2.10.6 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.2.11 Record status .........................................................................................................................6-23
6.2.11.1 Fault reports..................................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.11.2 Control events ................................................................................................................................. 6-24
6.2.11.3 Oscillography................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.2.11.4 Data logger....................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.2.11.5 Demand.............................................................................................................................................. 6-26
6.2.11.6 Energy................................................................................................................................................. 6-26

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-7

 CHAPTER 1:

6.2.11.7 RCL Last Statistics ..........................................................................................................................6-27

6.2.11.8 RCL Mean Statistics .......................................................................................................................6-28
6.2.12 IEEE 1588 precision time protocol (PTP) .................................................................... 6-28
6.2.13 Redundancy ........................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.3 Metering ...........................................................................................................6-30
6.3.1 Primary values ...................................................................................................................... 6-30
6.3.1.1 Current.................................................................................................................................................6-30
6.3.1.2 Source and Load Voltages .........................................................................................................6-31
6.3.1.3 Power ...................................................................................................................................................6-31
6.3.1.4 Energy..................................................................................................................................................6-32
6.3.1.5 Demand ..............................................................................................................................................6-32
6.3.2 Per Unit values ...................................................................................................................... 6-33
6.3.2.1 Current (per unit) .............................................................................................................................6-33
6.3.2.2 Source and Load Voltages (per unit)......................................................................................6-33
6.3.3 Phasor diagram .................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.3.4 Frequency ............................................................................................................................... 6-35
6.3.5 Power Quality ........................................................................................................................ 6-35
6.3.5.1 Current Harmonics ........................................................................................................................6-35
6.3.5.2 Source Voltage Harmonics ........................................................................................................6-35
6.3.5.3 Load Voltage Harmonics ............................................................................................................6-36
6.4 Inputs / outputs ..............................................................................................6-37
6.4.1 Contact inputs ....................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.4.2 Contact output status........................................................................................................ 6-38
6.4.3 Contact output operates.................................................................................................. 6-38
6.4.4 Contact output resets........................................................................................................ 6-39
6.4.5 I/O board status.................................................................................................................... 6-40
6.4.6 Virtual inputs .......................................................................................................................... 6-40
6.4.7 Virtual outputs....................................................................................................................... 6-40
6.4.8 Remote outputs .................................................................................................................... 6-41
6.4.9 Remote inputs ....................................................................................................................... 6-42
6.4.10 Analog inputs......................................................................................................................... 6-43
6.4.11 Virtual output latched........................................................................................................ 6-43
6.4.12 RIOs ............................................................................................................................................ 6-43
6.5 Records.............................................................................................................6-44
6.5.1 Event recorder....................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.5.1.1 All snapshot events........................................................................................................................6-44
6.5.1.2 New snapshot events...................................................................................................................6-45
6.5.1.3 Control events ..................................................................................................................................6-45
6.5.1.4 Alarm panel .......................................................................................................................................6-46
6.5.2 Waveform capture.............................................................................................................. 6-47
6.5.3 Fault report ............................................................................................................................. 6-48
6.5.4 Data logger............................................................................................................................. 6-49
6.6 Autorecloser / Recloser .................................................................................6-50

7 IEC 61850 7.1 IEC 61850 Overview.......................................................................................... 7-1

PROTOCOL 7.2 IEC 61850 generic substation state event (GSSE) ....................................... 7-2
7.2.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.2 Remote communication......................................................................................................7-2
7.2.3 GSSE configuration ................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.4 Remote inputs ..........................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.5 Remote outputs .......................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.5.1 DNA bit pairs ....................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.5.2 UserSt bit pairs................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3 IEC 61850 Edition 2 profile for R650 .............................................................. 7-7
7.3.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................7-7
7.3.1.1 Scope and outline of IEC 61850................................................................................................. 7-8

1-8 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1:

7.3.2 Communication profiles...................................................................................................... 7-9

7.3.3 TCP connection timing......................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.4 MMS protocol ........................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.5 Peer-to-peer communication........................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.6 File services............................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.7 IEC 61850 conformance statements ..........................................................................7-10
7.3.7.1 Abbreviations and acronyms................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.7.2 Definitions of the ISO/OSI reference model....................................................................... 7-10
7.3.7.3 Conformance statements for R650 devices ..................................................................... 7-11
7.3.7.4 PICS for R650 relays ..................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.7.5 MICS for R650 relays .................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.3.7.6 TICS for R650 relays...................................................................................................................... 7-67
7.3.7.7 PIXIT for R650 relays .................................................................................................................... 7-70
7.4 IEC 61850 FUNCTIONALITY ........................................................................... 7-79
7.4.1 Client Connections...............................................................................................................7-79
7.4.2 GOOSES.....................................................................................................................................7-79
7.4.2.1 TRANSMISSION GOOSES ............................................................................................................. 7-79
7.4.2.2 RECEPTION GOOSES ..................................................................................................................... 7-79
7.4.3 IEC 61850 Server...................................................................................................................7-79
7.4.3.1 LOGICAL DEVICES AND REPORTS............................................................................................ 7-79
7.5 IEC 61850 Status............................................................................................. 7-80
7.5.1 GOOSES Status ......................................................................................................................7-80
7.5.2 IEC 61850 CID Status ..........................................................................................................7-81
7.6 IEC 61850 Configurator ................................................................................. 7-83
7.6.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................7-83
7.6.2 Online/Offline operation modes....................................................................................7-83
7.6.3 IEC 61850 configurator details ......................................................................................7-84
7.6.3.1 IEC 61850 configurator interface. .......................................................................................... 7-85
7.6.3.1.1 Menu toolbar....................................................................................................................... 7-85
7.6.3.1.2 Quick Menu Toolbar......................................................................................................... 7-89
7.6.3.1.3 IEC 61850 IED Explorer Window................................................................................. 7-93

8 SECURITY 8.1 Adding users...................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 User rights ................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Changing passwords ....................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 Enabling security.............................................................................................. 8-3
8.4 Logging into EnerVista 650 Setup ................................................................. 8-4

9 BOOTCODE AND 9.1 Communication parameters .......................................................................... 9-1

FIRMWARE 9.2 Firmware version upgrade ............................................................................. 9-3
UPGRADE 9.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.2.2 Firmware upgrade ................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.2.3 Order code upgrade process............................................................................................ 9-6
9.3 Summary of main firmware upgrade steps................................................. 9-9

10 COMMISSIONING 10.1 Visual inspection ............................................................................................ 10-1

10.2 Out of service setting .................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 General considerations, power supply network....................................... 10-4
10.4 Isolation tests.................................................................................................. 10-4
10.5 Indicators......................................................................................................... 10-5
10.6 Power supply testing ..................................................................................... 10-6
10.7 Communications ............................................................................................ 10-6
10.8 Inputs and outputs......................................................................................... 10-7

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-9

 CHAPTER 1:

10.8.1 Digital inputs .......................................................................................................................... 10-7

10.8.2 Contact outputs, I/O boards type 1 and 2 ............................................................... 10-8
10.8.3 Circuit continuity supervision inputs .......................................................................... 10-8
10.8.4 Latching circuits ................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.9 Connections for testing measurements and protection elements ......10-9

11 FREQUENTLY ASKED 11.1 Communications.............................................................................................11-1

QUESTIONS 11.2 Protection ........................................................................................................11-3
11.3 Relay configuration........................................................................................11-3
11.4 Control & HMI ..................................................................................................11-4

12 R650 12.1 Symptoms and recommended actions.......................................................12-1

TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE

A LOGIC OPERANDS A.1 Operands - R650 - model FX - GX ..................................................................A-1

B MODBUS PROTOCOL B.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................B-1

B.2 MODBUS R650 ..................................................................................................B-2
B.2.1 Implemented MODBUS functionality .......................................................................... B-2
B.2.2 Physical layer ......................................................................................................................... B-2
B.2.2.1 Serial layer...........................................................................................................................................B-2
B.2.2.2 B.2.2.2 TCP/IP layer..........................................................................................................................B-2
B.2.3 Data link layer ........................................................................................................................ B-2
B.2.4 Generic reading ..................................................................................................................... B-4
B.2.5 Generic writing ....................................................................................................................... B-5
B.2.6 Function codes ....................................................................................................................... B-6
B.2.7 Exception and error responses ...................................................................................... B-6
B.3 Data type ...........................................................................................................B-7
B.4 MODBUS data ...................................................................................................B-8
B.4.1 Data management .............................................................................................................. B-8
B.4.2 Writing settings ...................................................................................................................... B-8
B.4.3 Snapshot events .................................................................................................................... B-8
B.4.4 Operations .............................................................................................................................B-11
B.4.5 Force outputs of IO boards ............................................................................................B-11
B.4.6 Control events ......................................................................................................................B-12
B.4.6.1 Event structure ............................................................................................................................... B-13
B.4.6.2 Event collection process............................................................................................................. B-14
B.4.6.3 Control events from the command line.............................................................................. B-15
B.4.6.4 Event status request (alarms) .................................................................................................. B-15
B.4.6.5 Acknowledging alarms ............................................................................................................... B-16
B.4.7 Write virtual inputs .............................................................................................................B-16
B.4.8 User map ................................................................................................................................B-16
B.4.9 Time synchronization .......................................................................................................B-16
B.4.10 Queueing messages ..........................................................................................................B-17
B.4.11 Traces and troubleshooting ...........................................................................................B-18
B.4.12 MODBUS CRC generation function .............................................................................B-18
B.5 Memory map ..................................................................................................B-21

C DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL C.1 DNP 3.0 protocol settings ..............................................................................C-1

FOR R650 C.2 DNP 3.0 device profile document .................................................................C-5

1-10 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1:

C.3 Implementation table .....................................................................................C-8

C.4 Binary input points ........................................................................................C-11
C.5 DNP configuration examples .......................................................................C-13
C.5.1 Configuring DNP user map ............................................................................................ C-13
C.5.2 Example of custom binary input points map ....................................................... C-15
C.5.3 Multiple DNP 3.0 masters communication with R650 ...................................... C-16
C.6 Binary output and control relay output ....................................................C-18
C.7 Binary counters .............................................................................................C-19
C.8 Analog inputs .................................................................................................C-20

D IEC 60870-5-104 D.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................D-1

PROTOCOL D.2 Technical description ......................................................................................D-1
D.3 Basic application functions ...........................................................................D-2
D.4 IEC 104 settings ...............................................................................................D-3
D.5 IEC 60870-5-104 point list ........................................................................... D-10
D.6 IEC 60870-5-104 Interoperability .............................................................. D-11

E IEC 60870-5-101 E.1 Introduction....................................................................................................... E-1

PROTOCOL E.2 Protocol structure ............................................................................................ E-1
E.3 Transmission procedures ............................................................................... E-2
E.4 Basic application functions ............................................................................ E-2
E.5 IEC 101 settings ................................................................................................ E-4
E.6 Points List........................................................................................................... E-6
E.6.1 IEC 60870-5-101 User Map ............................................................................................... E-6
E.6.2 Groups of Data ........................................................................................................................ E-6
E.6.3 Commands..............................................................................................................................E-11
E.7 IEC 60870-5-101 Interoperability ................................................................ E-12
E.7.1 System or device..................................................................................................................E-12
E.7.2 Network Configuration ......................................................................................................E-12
E.7.3 Physical layer.........................................................................................................................E-12
E.7.3.1 Transmission speed (control direction)................................................................................ E-12
E.7.3.2 Transmission speed (monitor direction) .............................................................................. E-13
E.7.4 Link layer..................................................................................................................................E-13
E.7.5 Application layer...................................................................................................................E-14
E.7.6 Basic application functions .............................................................................................E-19

F IEC 60870-5-103 F.1 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol .............................................................................. F-1

PROTOCOL F.1.1 Interoperability document ................................................................................................ F-1
F.1.2 Application level ..................................................................................................................... F-7

G REDUNDANCY G.1 PRP and HSR Ethernet protocols ..................................................................G-1

PROTOCOL G.1.1 PRP ...............................................................................................................................................G-4
G.1.2 HSR ...............................................................................................................................................G-5
G.2 RSTP (IEEE 802.1D-2004) and daisy chain ...................................................G-6
G.2.1 RSTP description ....................................................................................................................G-6
G.2.2 RSTP concepts ........................................................................................................................G-6
G.2.3 Use in meshed networks ...................................................................................................G-7
G.2.4 Daisy chain ..............................................................................................................................G-7
G.3 Link loss alert (LLA) ..........................................................................................G-8
G.3.1 LLA ................................................................................................................................................G-8
G.3.2 LLA priority ...............................................................................................................................G-8

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-11

 CHAPTER 1:

G.3.3 LLA timeout .............................................................................................................................. G-8

H FACTORY DEFAULT H.1 Factory default settings ............................................................................... H-1

CONFIGURATION

I MISCELLANEOUS I.1 GE Multilin warranty ........................................................................................ I-1

I.2 Revision History ................................................................................................ I-2
I.2.1 Major Updates........................................................................................................................... I-2

1-12 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

GE
Grid Solutions

R650 Recloser Controller

Chapter 1: Getting Started

GETTING STARTED

1.1 Important procedures

Use this chapter for initial setup of your new R650 Recloser Controller.

1.1.1 Cautions and warnings

To help ensure years of trouble free operation, please read through the following chapter for information to help guide you
through the initial installation procedures of your new relay.
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all warnings and cautions in this manual are reviewed to
help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/or downtime.
The following safety and equipment symbols are used in this document.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
NOTICE

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-1

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.1.1.1 General cautions and warnings

Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk of shock
WARNING and/or fire, for example such as can arise from high voltage connected to low voltage terminals.
• Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type, terminal torque settings,
voltage, current magnitudes applied, and adequate isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low
voltage circuits.
• Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
• Ensure that all ground paths are uncompromised for safety purposes during device operation and service.
• Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the AC current, and voltage input match the ratings
specified on the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or voltage in excess of the specified limits.
• Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety
cautions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.
• Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers, voltage
transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to
attempting work on the device.
• Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current transformers. Make sure that
current transformer secondary circuits are shorted out before making or removing any connection to the current
transformer (CT) input terminals of the device.
• For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages or currents are connected to
such equipment and that trip and close commands to the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are
isolated, unless this is required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant procedure.
• When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers, isolators, and other switching
apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are
working on or around this primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
• Uses an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.

LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M. Class 1M
WARNING devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical instruments.

When conducting local maintenance use the "Local" setting "OFF" along with the HOT line tag
CAUTION feature as a secondary means of protection and isolation. This recommendation is in addition to
local safety requirements such as LOTO.

This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial
NOTICE environments. Not to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.

1-2 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

Figure 1-1: Front view of R650 unit

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-3

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.1.1.2 Communication board withdrawal/insertion

MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION SHALL ONLY BE PERFORMED BY DULY QUALIFIED

WARNING SERVICE PERSONNEL. FOR PERSONAL SECURITY PURPOSES, BEFORE ACCOMPLISHING ANY
WITHDRAWAL OR INSERTION OPERATION, THE RELAY MUST BE POWERED OFF AND ALL THE REAR
TERMINALS MUST BE POTENTIAL FREE. THE RELAY MUST BE GROUNDED USING THE REAR
GROUNDING SCREW.

The modular design of the relay allows for the withdrawal and insertion of the communication module.
Figure 1-2: Module withdrawal/insertion shows the location of communication modules on the rear part of the relay.
Qualified personnel must carry out the insertion or extraction of the communication boards only after disconnecting the
relay auxiliary voltage and ensuring that all the rear terminals are potential free.
Communication boards are installed on the rear of the unit, with upper port reserved for the asynchronous
communications board and CAN bus, and the lower port for the ETHERNET board.

Before performing any of these actions, control power must be removed from the relay and all the rear terminals must
be potential free. A grounded antistatic wristband must be used when manipulating the module in order to avoid
electrostatic discharges that may cause damage to the electronic components.
WITHDRAWAL: Loosen the small screws that keep the faceplate in place and extract the module.
INSERTION: Insert the module and press it firmly in the case, until it is completely fixed. After this, bolt the faceplate
screws and replace the control power. Check that the relay is fully operative.

Figure 1-2: Module withdrawal/insertion

GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage to the relay, connected equipment or personnel whenever these
safety rules are not followed.

1-4 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1.3 Magnetic module terminals

The transformer module for the LEA voltage inputs and CTs is already connected to a female connector screwed to the
case. The current inputs incorporate shorting bars, so that the module can be extracted without the need to short-circuit
the currents externally. It is very important, for safety reasons, not to change or switch the terminals for CTs and LEA
voltage inputs.

G F
H
PS2 1 1
1 +/L 2 2
2 3 3
3 4 4
4 5 5
6 6
B A
5 IA VLA
6 7 7
8 8
1 1
7
8 9 9
9 +/N 10 10 2 2
11 11 VLB
IB
12 12 3 3
13 13
14 14
15 15 4 4
16 16 IC VLC
17 17 5 5
18 18
G F 6 6
VSA
G F 7 7
H
PS1 19 19
10 +/L 20 20 8 8
11 21 21 IG VSB
12 22 22 9 9
13 23 23
14 24 24
15 25 25 10 10
16 26 26 VSC
ISG
17 27 27 11 11
18 +/N 28 28
29 29
12 12
30 30
31 31
B A
32 32
33 33
34 34
H 35 35
IRIG B
36 36
19 +
20 - G F

Figure 1-3: Rear view of R650 unit

GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage of the relay, connected equipment or personnel whenever
these safety rules are not followed.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-5

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.1.2 Inspection checklist

1. Unwrap the relay and inspect the relay for physical damage.
2. View the nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered and delivered. The model number is at the
top.

Figure 1-4: Identification label (A4454P65)

Please ensure that you received the following items with your relay:
• Mounting screws for fixing the relay to a cabinet
• GE EnerVista™ DVD (includes the EnerVista 650 Setup software and manuals in PDF format)
• Wiring diagram.
• Certificate of Compliance

1-6 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin Home
Page: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-7

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

Note: If there is any physical damage detected on the relay, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact
GE Grid Solutions, Multilin immediately:

EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA:

GE Grid Solutions
Av. Pinoa, 10
48170 Zamudio, Vizcaya (SPAIN)
Tel.: (34) 94-485 88 54
Fax: (34) 94-485 88 38
E-mail: [email protected]

AMERICA, ASIA AND AUSTRALIA:

GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
North America toll-free: +1 800 547 8629
Tel.: +1 905 927 7070
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
E-mail: [email protected]

The information provided herein is not intended to cover all the details of the variations of the
CAUTION equipment, nor does it take into account the circumstances that may be present in your
installation, operating or maintenance activities.
Should you wish to receive additional information, or for any particular problem that cannot be solved by referring to the
information contained herein, please contact General Electric, Grid Solutions.

1-8 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.3 Safety instructions

The R650 ground screw shown in Figure 1-5: Location of grounding screw must be correctly grounded.

Figure 1-5: Location of grounding screw

Before communicating with the R650 through the front USB port, ensure that the computer's power supply is grounded.
When using a laptop, it is recommended that the power supply be disconnected. In many cases the laptop may not be
correctly grounded either due to the power supply or to the connector cables used.

GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage to the relay or connected equipment when this basic safety rule
is not followed.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-9

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.1.3.1 General safety instructions

CAUTION
• Failure to observe and follow the instructions provided in the equipment manual(s) could cause irreversible
damage to the equipment and could lead to property damage, personal injury and/or death.
• Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and caution indicators are reviewed.
• Beware of potential hazards, wear personal protective equipment and carefully inspect the work area for tools
and objects that may have been left inside the equipment.
• Test/Installation/Service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices, safety precautions and
follow standard ESD precautions to avoid personal injury or equipment damage.
• Caution: Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device or associated circuits, isolate
or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources of electric power.
• Before working on CTs, they must be short-circuited
• In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made must respect the applicable local
jurisdiction electrical code.
• All recommended equipment that should be grounded must have a reliable and un-compromised grounding path
for safety purposes, protection against electromagnetic interference and proper device operation. Keep all
ground leads
• Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facility's main ground system for primary
power.
• Keep all ground leads as short as possible.
• At all times, equipment ground terminal must be grounded during device operation.
• While the equipment manual may suggest several safety and reliability steps, safety precautions must be used in
conjunction with the safety codes in force at your location.
• LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M. Class 1M devices are
considered eye safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical instruments
• It is the responsibility of the user to check the equipment ratings and installation instructions prior to
commissioning, service or maintenance.
• Use a lift system with side rails/bucket to reduce a fall hazard as opposed to other means when installing or
servicing.
• Failure to shut equipment power off prior to removing the power connections could expose user to dangerous
voltages causing injury or death.
• Do not remove the voltage terminal blocks or disconnect the voltage input wires when the voltage phases are
live. The voltage inputs must be de-energized prior to any servicing.

1-10 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.3.2 Warning symbols

The following table explains the meaning of warning symbols that may appear on the device or in this manual.

The relevant circuit is direct current.

Le circuit principal est à courant continu.
The relevant circuit is alternating current.
Le circuit principal est à courant alternatif.
CAUTION: Refer to the documentation for important operating and maintenance
instructions. Failure to take or avoid a specified action can result in loss of data or
! physical damage.
AVERTISSEMENT: Se réferer à la documentation pour l'entretien et l'utilisation.
L'absence ou èviter de prender des mesures spècifiques peut entraîner des pertes
de données ou même causer des dommages physiques.
WARNING! Dangerous voltage constituting a risk of electric shock is present
within the unit. Failure to take or avoid a specified action can result in physical
harm to the user.
AVERTISSEMENT! Tensions dangereuses comportant un risque de choc électrique
sont presents dans l'equipement. L'absence ou èviter de prender des mesures
spècifiques peut causer des dommages physiques à l'utilisateur.
CAUTION: Class 1M Laser (IEC 60825-1 Safety of laser products)
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS.
AVERTISSEMENT: Laser de classe 1M (IEC60825-1) ÉVITER DE REGARDER
DIRECTEMENT LE DISPOSITIF QUI ÉMET LE LASER OPTIQUE.
CAUTION: Hot surface.
AVERTISSEMENT: Surface chaude.

Earth (Ground) Terminal.

Terminal de terre (masse).

Protective Earth Terminal.

Terminal de terre de protection.

Note: Read all instructions included in package before using your product. Additional safety information
Product Safety Supplement document available at; http://www.gegridsolutions.com/ProductSafety/

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-11

1.2 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.2 Overview
1.2.1 Introduction to the 650 family of relays
The GE 650 family relay is a new generation of digital and multifunction equipment that is easily incorporated into
automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels.

1.2.2 Hardware architecture

1.2.2.1 R650 basic design

The 650 is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The 650 family can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming
device, or another 650 device.
The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as
programming logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input Elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The 650 isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output Elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital signals that can be used to
control field devices.
Figure 1-6: 650 concept block diagram

INPUT ELEMENTS CT MODULE OUTPUT ELEMENTS

CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS PROTECTION
ELEMENTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS

CT INPUTS
REMOTE CAN BUS
LEA INPUTS
OUTPUTS
PLC (LOGIC)

BUS CAN
BUS CAN

REMOTE CAN BUS INPUTS

REMOTE OUTPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS

LAN
PROGRAMMING OPERATOR
DEVICE INTERFACE

1-12 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.2 OVERVIEW

1.2.2.2 R650 signal type

Contact Inputs/Outputs: Digital signals.
CT and LEA inputs: Signals coming from the current and voltage inputs, used for monitoring the power system signals.
Remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs: Signals associated with physical input/output contacts from a Remote Digital Input/
Output Module (CIO) connected to the 650 unit via the CAN Bus existing in options X, Y, Z, C and M for rear serial
communication board 1.
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. Control module that enables the unit configuration (assignment of inputs/outputs)
and the implementation of logic circuits.
Protection Elements: Relay protection elements, for example: Overcurrent, overvoltage, etc.
Remote inputs and outputs: Provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote devices using IEC
61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages.
Analog Inputs: Signals associated with transducers.

1.2.3 Communications architecture

A dedicated serial port is used for communication between the main processor and the human-machine interface. The
serial connection provides immunity against electromagnetic disturbances, thus increasing system safety.
All 650 units incorporate one USB port on the front of the relay. They can also incorporate up to two additional
communication modules on the rear.
One of the modules provides asynchronous serial communications, using different physical media (RS485 + cable remote
CAN bus I/O, plastic or glass fiber optic) depending on the selected model. The module incorporates two identical ports,
COM1 and COM2. The COM2 port is multiplexed with the front port. Additionally, this module may incorporate a port for
CAN bus communications, used for the connection to the remote CAN Bus I/O module. This feature increases the I/O
capability by up to 100% if the maximum number of I/Os available inside the relay is not enough for a specific application.
Available options are:
Table 1-1: Rear serial communications board 1
Board Code Functionality
F Without additional communication ports
A Two RS485 ports
P Two Plastic F.O. ports
G Two Glass F.O. ports
X Two RS485 ports and a CAN port for remote CAN bus Inputs/Outputs
Y Two Plastic F.O. ports and a CAN port for remote CAN bus Inputs/Outputs (fiber)
Z Two Glass F.O. ports and a CAN port for remote CAN bus Inputs/Outputs (fiber)
C CAN port for remote CAN Bus I/O (cable)
M RS485 + RS485 port and a CAN port for remote CAN Bus I/O (cable)

The other module provides Ethernet communications (ETH Port), using 10/100BaseTX (self-negotiable speed) or 100BaseFX
connectors, depending on the selected model. The most complete models include a double redundant 100BaseFX fiber
optic port.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-13

1.2 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

Available Options are:

Table 1-2: REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2
J PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
K PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
L PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX + Redundant 100 Base TX
M PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX + Redundant 100 Base TX

Internal communication with input and output modules is performed via an internal CAN Bus, independent of the one used
for remote CAN Bus I/Os. This provides increased communication speed, and acknowledgement of modules,
abnormalities, etc. As this is a serial port supporting a communications protocol, it provides immunity against external or
internal disturbances.

CAN COM1 COM2

ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

CAN
REMOTE
ETH1 Redundancy I/O
(Optional)

SERIAL
MAIN PROCESSOR COM 1
DIGITAL SUPERVISION
ETH2 ETH3
COMMUNICATION
CONTROL I/O I/O
PROTECTION
CAN I/O
INTERNAL

SERIAL MULTIPLEXED
SERIAL COM 2
DSP COM H
MEASUREMENT
PROCESSOR

ANALOG
SERIAL
INPUTS COM2
COM H
CURENT AC
AND FRONT
VOLTAGE AC HMI HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE SERIAL
PORT

Figure 1-7: Communications architecture (B6816F2)

1-14 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

1.3 EnerVista 650 Setup software

1.3.1 System requirements
The relay front panel or the EnerVista 650 Setup software can be used to communicate with the relay. The software
interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the computer monitor can display more
information.
The minimum system requirements for the EnerVista 650 Setup software are as follows:
• Pentium® 4 (Core Duo recommended).
• Windows® XP with Service Pack 2 (Service Pack 3 recommended), Windows 7, or Windows 8
• 1 GB of RAM (2 GB recommended).
• 500 MB free hard drive space (1 GB recommended).
• 1024 x 768 display (1280 x 800 recommended).
• USB serial and/or Ethernet port for communications with the relay.

1.3.2 Installation
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista 650 Setup are met (see previous section), obtain the
software from the GE EnerVista DVD, or download from: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/ as follows:
1. Insert the GE EnerVista DVD into the DVD drive of your computer.
2. Click Install Now and follow the installation instructions to install the complimentary EnerVista software.
3. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click IED Setup in the Launch Pad window.

Figure 1-8: Launchpad window

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-15

1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

5. Click Add Product and select the “R650 Recloser Controller” relay from the Install Software window as shown below.
Select the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software release, or select “CD” if you do not have a web
connection, then click Add Now to list software items for the R650.

Figure 1-9: Add Product window

6. EnerVista Launchpad obtains the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, double-
click the installation program to install the EnerVista 650 Setup software.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the EnerVista 650 Setup software. When the Welcome window appears,
click Next to continue with the installation.

Figure 1-10: EnerVista 650 Setup installation

1-16 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

8. When the Choose Destination Location window is displayed, change the installation directory id needed by clicking
Change… and typing in the complete path name including the new directory name. Click Next to continue with the
installation.

Figure 1-11: EnerVista 650 Setup installation cont.

9. The default program group containing the application is added to as shown in the Selected Program Folder window.
Click Next to begin the installation process, and all the necessary program files are copied into the selected directory.

Figure 1-12: Select program folder

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-17

1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

10. To complete the installation, select the desired language for startup.

Figure 1-13: Language window

11. Click Finish to end the installation. The R650 device has been added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista
Launchpad window, as shown below.

Figure 1-14: EnerVista Launchpad

1-18 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

1.3.3 Connecting EnerVista 650 Setup to the R650

This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the EnerVista 650 Setup software. Refer to section 4.1 in this manual
for more information about the EnerVista 650 Setup software interface.

1.3.3.1 Configuring an Ethernet connection

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 650 Setup software (available from the GE EnerVista DVD or online
from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin (see previous section for installation instructions).
2. Go to Communication > Computer.
3. Select Control Type as MODBUS TCP/IP from the drop-down list. This option displays a number of interface
parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet communications.
4. Enter the relay IP address (from Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > Network > IP Address) in the
IP Address field in MODBUS TCP/IP SETUP.
5. Enter the relay ModBus address (from Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > ModBus Protocol >
ModBus Address COM1/COM2 setting) in the Unit Identifier (Slave Address) field.
6. Enter the ModBus port address (from Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > ModBus Protocol >
ModBus Port Number setting) in the ModBus Port field.
7. The Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Click ON to begin communicating.

1.3.3.2 Configuring the USB connection

Before starting, verify that the USB Cable, is properly connected to the USB port on the front panel of the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 650 Setup software (available from the GE EnerVista DVD or online
from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/index.htm (see previous section for installation instructions).
2. Go to Communication > Computer and enter the following data referred to communications:
3. Under Control Type select No Control Type from the drop-down list.
4. Enter the relay Slave Address (Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > ModBus Protocol) in the Slave
Address field. The default value is 254.
5. Enter the physical communications parameters (Baud rate and parity settings) from the Setpoint > Product Setup >
Communication Settings > Serial Ports menu. Default values are 19200 for baud rate and none for parity.
6. The unit has now been configured for communications. Click ON to begin communicating.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-19

1.4 650 HARDWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.4 650 hardware

1.4.1 Mounting & wiring
Refer to Chapter 3. Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions.

1.4.2 650 communications

The Enervista 650 Setup software communicates with the relay via the faceplate USB port or the rear RS485/Ethernet
ports. To communicate via the USB port a male A / male B USB shielded wire is needed
To communicate via the R650 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is
required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a “straight-through” serial cable. A shielded
twisted-pair (20, 22 or 24 AWG according to American standards; 0.25, 0.34 or 0.5 mm2 according to European standards)
connects the F485 converter to the R650 rear communication port.
To minimize communication errors that can be caused by external noise, a shielded twisted pair is recommended. In order
to avoid loops where external currents can flow, the cable shield must be grounded at one end only.
The converter box (-, +, GND) terminals are connected to the relay (SDA, SDB, GND) terminals respectively. For long
communications cables (longer than 1 km), the RS485 circuit must be terminated in an RC network (i.e. 120 ohm, 1 nF). This
circuit is shown in Figure 1-16: RS485 connection for 650 units, associated with the text Zt(*).

USB USB

Figure 1-15: Relay- PC connection for RS232 front port

To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. For correct operation, polarity must
be respected, although a different polarity will not damage the unit. For instance, the relays must be connected with all
RS485 SDA terminals connected together, and all SDB terminals connected together. This may result in confusion, as the
RS485 standard refers to terminals “A” and “B”, although many devices use terminals labeled “+” and “-“.
As a general rule, terminals labeled “A” should be connected to terminals “-“, and terminals “B” to “+”. The GND terminal
should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. Otherwise, it should be connected to the shield.
Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next relay in the system. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this
manner without exceeding driver capability; for larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also
possible to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel. Do not use other
connection configurations.
Lightening strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are provided internally. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.

1-20 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.4 650 HARDWARE

Figure 1-16: RS485 connection for 650 units

To communicate through the R650 rear Ethernet port from a PC, a crossover cable is required. If the connection is
performed through a hub or a switch, a direct Ethernet cable is required.

1.4.3 Faceplate display

All messages are displayed on a 20x4 character LCD display. An optional graphic display is also available. Messages are
displayed in different languages depending on the model and configuration settings.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-21

1.4 650 HARDWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.4.4 Maintenance

1.4.4.1 General maintenance

The R650 requires minimum maintenance once it is commissioned into service. R650 is a microprocessor based relay and
its characteristics do not change over time; as such no further functional tests are required. While the R650 performs
continual self-tests, it is recommended that maintenance be scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance
can involve in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin or one of its representative for
prompt service.

1.4.4.2 In-service maintenance

1. Visual verification of the analog value integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices in the
system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages and LED indications.
3. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust or loose wires.
4. Event recorder file download with further event analysis.

1.4.4.3 Out-of-service maintenance

1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog value (current, voltages, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated test
equipment is required.
3. Protection element setpoint verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against
relay settings).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the
system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.

To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized
NOTICE state once per year, for one hour continuously.

1.4.4.4 Unscheduled maintenance

Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption:
• View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs,outputs and elements.

1.4.5 Storage
Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow the storage temperature range
outlined in the Specifications.

To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized
NOTICE state once per year, for one hour continuously.

1-22 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.4 650 HARDWARE

1.4.6 Repairs
The firmware and software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for repair is as follows:
• Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in the first chapter.
• Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support Center.
• Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
• Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to cushion
the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of
cushioning material.
• Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA, to the factory.
• Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department. Customers are responsible for
shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the unit is under warranty.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm

1.4.7 Disposal
The R650 is intended to be part of defective large-scale stationary industrial tools and large-scale fixed installations. This
product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. For proper recycling return this
product to your supplier or a designated collection point. For more information go to www.recyclethis.info.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 1-23

1.4 650 HARDWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1-24 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

GE
Grid Solutions

R650 Recloser Controller

Chapter 2: Product Description

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.1 R650 Overview

The R650 is a recloser controller and has been designed to deliver optimum performance for Distribution Network
Operators. The R650 achieves precise and efficient recloser functionality through the intelligent design of the integration
between the controller device and the recloser. Bespoke driving electronics for individual recloser devices ensure that
there is minimal delay between the R650 output signals and the breaker operation. This ’best in class’ speed of operation is
achieved using minimal power, thereby ensuring true multiple shot capability. The R650 then goes beyond its high-
performance functionality by providing power system engineers with the data, measurement accuracy, and visibility
needed for comprehensive asset management. The R650’s advanced asset monitoring and diagnostic capabilities link
elegantly with a number of Distribution automation tools, and provide Network Operators with both the fundamentals of
efficient and reliable network restoration, and the visibility to replace reactive actions with proactive actions.
The complete range of Industry-required protection elements is embedded in the R650, including the full range of
Overcurrents, Sensitive Directional Power, Wattmetric Zero Sequence Directional, Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent,
and Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent.
For communications, the R650 has redundant Ethernet and Fiber port options and supports a wide range of industry
standard protocols such as IEC 61850, DNP 3.0 serial, DNP 3.0 TCP/IP, IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104,
Mosbuc RTU and Modbus TCP/IP.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-1

2.1 R650 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The R650 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added:

SOURCE

LEA Sensors

Recloser CLOSE / OPEN 47 27 59

3 3 3
3
79
Breaker Monitoring 1 59N
3
3 Broken
49 50PH 50PL 46 32FP 32 67P 67N
60CTS 50BF Conductor 51PH/V 51PL/V 32N 50N 51N
3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
25
3 3 3 3
1

2HRB
1A / 5A 50G 51G 67G
3 3 3

0.2A 50SG 51SG 50IG 67SG

3 3 3 3 Metering
3V0

LEA Sensors

47 27 59 81U 81O VTFF

59N
3 3 3 3 3 1
3

LOAD

Figure 2-1: FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

2-2 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS

2.2 ANSI device numbers and functions

Main features available in the relay are gathered in tables below

DEVICE NUMBER PROTECTION & CONTROL FUNCTIONS

25 Synchronism Check
27 Source/Load Undervoltage
32 Sensitive Directional Power
32FP Forward Power
32N Wattmetric Zero-Sequence Directional
46 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent
47 Negative Sequence Voltage
49P Thermal Model
50 BF Breaker Failure
50PH/PL Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (High/Low)
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
50SG Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent for sensitive ground systems (measured from 5th current
transformer input)
50IG Isolated Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (measured from 5th current transformer input)
51N Neutral Time Overcurrent
51G Ground Time Overcurrent
51SG Sensitive Ground Time Overcurrent
51PH/V Voltage Restraint Phase Time Overcurrent
51PL/V Voltage Restraint Phase Time Overcurrent
59 Source/Load Overvoltage
59N Source/Load Neutral Overvoltage
67P Phase Directional Overcurrent
67N Neutral Directional Overcurrent
67SG Sensitive Ground Directional Overcurrent
79 Autoreclose (Four shot recloser)
81 U/O Under/Over Frequency
N/A Broken Conductor
VTFF VT Fuse Failure Detection
60CTS Failure Current Transformer Failure
2nd Harmonic Second Harminic Inhibit
Inhibit

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-3

2.3 OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.3 Other device functions

INPUTS/OUTPUTS METERING COMMUNICATIONS

11 Analog Inputs: Metering Current for phases, ground and USB port in HMI option E, Two rear
5 current inputs (3 for phases, 1 for ground, 1 sensitive ground inputs RS485/fibre optic ports, 10/100 TX and
for sensitive ground), 100 FX Mbps Ethernet port
6 LEA voltage inputs (3 source side, 3 load side)
Digital Programmable Contact Inputs (up to Voltages phase to phase and phase to ModBus Communications RTU and
64) ground over TCP/IP
Digital Programmable Contact Outputs (up to Real, Reactive and Apparent Power and DNP Multimaster (3.0 Level 2)
16) Power Factor
32 Latched Virtual Inputs Three Phase Energy IEC 870-5-104
32 Self-Reset Virtual Inputs
Virtual Outputs (up to 512) Frequency ModBus User Map
3 outputs for the Viper-ST recloser with coil Sequence components of currents and IEC 61850 protocol
supervision voltages
Remote Inputs/Outputs (GSSE and GOOSE Pulse Counters IEC 870-5-103 protocol
messages)
Analog Inputs (dCmA) Analog Comparators IEC 870-5-101 protocol
Digital Counters

USER INTERFACE RECORDS OTHERS

Alphanumerical display (4x20) Data Logger Recloser Wear Monitor
Graphic display (16 x 40) Demand IRIG-B synchronization/SNTP/
IEEE 1588
User Programmable LEDs (15) Event Recorder (up to 128 configurable Logic Equations (PLC Editor)
events)
User Programmable Keys (up to 5) Fault Locator and Fault report (up to 10 Operations (up to 32)
records)
Easy menu management Oscillography (up to 20 records) Web Server Application
Configurable One-Line Diagram (Graphic Snapshot Events (up to 1023) Cold Load Pickup (CLP)
model only)
Phasor Diagram (available in EnerVista 650
Setup)

2-4 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 ORDER CODES

2.4 Order codes

R650 units are supplied as ½ 19” rack, 6 units high, containing the following modules: power supply, CPU, I/O modules,
communication modules. The required information to completely define an R650 model is shown on Table 2–1:
Table 2-1: Order codes
R650 - - - F - G - - - - - DESCRIPTION
B Basic Display
M Enhanced Display
REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 1
F None
A Redundant RS485
P Redundant plastic fiber optic
G Redundant glass fiber optic
X Redundant RS485 + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
Y Redundant plastic fiber optic + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
Z Redundant glass fiber optic + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
C Cable Remote CAN bus I/O
M RS485 + cable Remote CAN bus I/O
REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2 (see Note 1)
L PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX*+ Redundant 100 Base TX
M PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX*+ Redundant 100 Base TX
J PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
K PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
I/O BOARD IN SLOT F
1 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs
2 8 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs + 2 Trip / Close circuit supervision
circuits
4 32 Digital Inputs (see Note 2)
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs (see Note 2)
6 Driving Electronics for Viper-ST + 8 Digital Inputs
I/O BOARD IN SLOT G
0 None
1 16 contact inputs + 8 Outputs
4 32 Digital Inputs
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
LO 24-48 Vdc (range 19.2 – 57.6)
110-250 Vdc (range 88 – 300)
HI
120-230 Vac (range 96 – 250)
LR Redundant LO
HR Redundant HI
LANGUAGE
E English/English
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
2 Modbus RTU, TCP/IP, DNP 3.0 Level 2,
IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 61850 Edition 2, Modbus RTU & TCP/IP, DNP 3.0 Level 2,
7
IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-101
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT ANALOG MEASUREMENTS
L LEA/ Standard CT- 6x LEA Phase Voltage Inputs + 3 Phase Current
Inputs CT + 1 Ground Current Input +1 Sensitive Ground Current

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-5

2.4 ORDER CODES CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
N Without Harsh (Chemical) Environment Conformal Coating
H Harsh (Chemical) Environment Conformal Coating

Notes:
(*) TX*: ETH E port is only intended for maintenance purposes.
(1) Advanced functionality available in Rear Ethernet Board 2:
Options J, L: PRP, IEEE 1588 PTP, and IEC 61850 Edition 2.0 including Digital counters, DFT, 16 Switchgear, 16 CILO nodes, and XSWI
node BlkOpn/BlkCls mapping.
Options K, M: HSR, RSTP, PRP, IEEE 1588 PTP, and IEC 61850 Edition 2.0 including Digital counters, DFT, Max numbers of starts, Cold
Load Pickup, 16 Switchgear, 16 CILO nodes, and XSWI node BlkOpn/BlkCls mapping.
(2) Order code option F4 requires option G4 or G5. Order code option F5 requires option G5.

2.4.1 CIO Modules

For applications requiring a high number of inputs and outputs, R650 units can be connected to a CIO module
(Remote CAN bus I/O module) for using up to 2 additional boards.
R650 units allow monitoring and configuring these I/O boards as if they were internal boards, located on slots F and G. In
this case, slots are labeled as H and J.
The required information to completely define a CIO Module is shown on Table 2–2:.
Table 2-2: Order code for CIO module
CIO H - J - - DESCRIPTION
I/O BOARD IN SLOT H
1 16 Digital inputs + 8 outputs
2 8 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs + 2 trip/close circuit supervision circuits
4 32 Digital Inputs
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs
I/O BOARD IN SLOT J
0 None
1 16 Digital inputs + 8 outputs
4 32 Digital Inputs (See Note 1)
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs (See Note 1)
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
LO 24-48 Vdc (range 19.2 – 57.6)
HI 110-250 Vdc (range 88 – 300)
120-230 Vac (range 96 – 250)
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
H Harsh (Chemical) Environment Conformal Coating

(1) The digit selected for option J must be equal or higher than the digit selected for option H for models including boards 4 and 5.
CIOH1J5**: is a valid selection
CIOH5J1**: is an invalid selection

2-6 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5 Technical specifications

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

2.5.1 Protection
Phase and Ground protection functions use currents measured through CT inputs for performing internal calculations,
while the Neutral protection functions use the current calculated from three phase currents.
The sensitive ground protection functions are usually used for applications where the neutral is completely isolated. These
functions use current measured though the sensitive ground current input. This CT has a sensitivity 10 time higher than
standard CT inputs (Connected to 1A and 5A CT) and its current withstand is lower.

PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (51PH/51PL)

Current Input:............................................................................. phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current: ........................................................................... for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Curve Shape:.............................................................................. IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial): ................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type: ................................................................................. instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Voltage Restraint: .................................................................... selectable by setting
Saturation Level: ...................................................................... 48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-7

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51G)

Current Input: .............................................................................phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current:............................................................................for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.05 to 20.00 x CTg in steps of 0.01 x CTg
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Curve Shape: ..............................................................................IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):.................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type: ..................................................................................instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Saturation Level: .......................................................................48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (51N)

Current Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Curve Shape: ..............................................................................IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):.................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type: ..................................................................................instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Saturation Level: .......................................................................48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

2-8 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SENSITIVE GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51SG)

Current Input:............................................................................. phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current: ........................................................................... for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.025 to 2.000 x CTsg in steps of 0.001 x CTsg
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ values at nominal frequency:
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 16.000 A
Curve Shape:.............................................................................. IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial): ................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type: ................................................................................. instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Saturation Level: ...................................................................... 48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

PHASE AND GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50PH/50PL/50G)

Current Input:............................................................................. phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current: ........................................................................... for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT (phase)
0.05 to 20.00 x CTg in steps of 0.01 x CTg (ground)
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Overreach: .................................................................................. < 2%
Trip Delay: ................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ............................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
at non-zero time delay: ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50N)

Current Input:............................................................................. fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Overreach: .................................................................................. < 2%
Trip Delay: ................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ............................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
at non-zero time delay: ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-9

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50SG)

Current Input: .............................................................................phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current:............................................................................for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.025 to 2.000 x CTsg in steps of 0.001 x CTsg
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 16.000 A
Overreach: ...................................................................................< 2%
Trip Delay:....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time: ............................................................................< 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
at non-zero time delay: ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

ISOLATED GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50IG)

Current Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Voltage Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Current Pickup Level: ..............................................................0.005 to 0.400 x CTg in steps of 0.001 x CTg
Voltage Pickup Level: ..............................................................0.02 to 0.400 x VT in steps of 0.001 x VT
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 16.000 A
Trip Delay:....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Time to Instantaneous:..........................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time: ............................................................................< 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
at non-zero time delay: ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT (46)

Current Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ±10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Curve Shape: ..............................................................................IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):.................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type: ..................................................................................instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Saturation Level: .......................................................................48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

2-10 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PHASE DIRECTIONAL (67P)

Directionality: ............................................................................ forward and reverse selectable by setting
Polarizing: .................................................................................... quadrature voltage:
ABC seq: Phase A (VBC), Phase B (VCA), Phase C (VAB)
ACB seq: Phase A (VCB), Phase B (VAC), Phase C (VBA)
Polarizing Voltage Threshold:............................................. 0 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Current Sensitivity Threshold:............................................ 50 mA
Characteristic Angle:.............................................................. -90º to +90º in steps of 1º
Block Logic:................................................................................. permission or block selectable by setting
Angle Accuracy: ....................................................................... ±3º for I > 0.1 A and V > 5 Vac
Voltage Memory Time:.......................................................... 0.00 to 3.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 30 ms, typically

GROUND DIRECTIONAL (67G)

Directionality: ............................................................................ forward and reverse selectable by setting
Polarizing: .................................................................................... voltage, current, dual
Polarizing Voltage:................................................................... VN
Polarizing Current:................................................................... Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
Operating Current: .................................................................. Ig (measured from 4th current transformer)
Polarizing Voltage Threshold:............................................. 0 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Polarizing Current Threshold:............................................. 0.005 A
Characteristic Angle:.............................................................. -90º to +90º in steps of 1º
Block Logic:................................................................................. permission or block selectable by setting
Angle Accuracy: ....................................................................... ±3º for I > 0.1 A and V > 5 Vac
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 30 ms, typically

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL (67N)

Directionality: ............................................................................ forward and reverse selectable by setting
Polarizing: .................................................................................... voltage, current, dual
Polarizing Voltage:................................................................... VN
Polarizing Current:................................................................... Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
Operating Current: .................................................................. IN
Polarizing Voltage Threshold:............................................. 0 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Polarizing Current Threshold:............................................. 0.005 A
Characteristic Angle:.............................................................. -90º to +90º in steps of 1º
Block Logic:................................................................................. permission or block selectable by setting
Angle Accuracy: ....................................................................... ±3º for I > 0.1 A and V > 5 Vac
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 30 ms, typically

SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL (67SG)

Directionality: ............................................................................ forward and reverse selectable by setting
Polarizing: .................................................................................... voltage
Polarizing Voltage:................................................................... VN
Operating Current: .................................................................. Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
Polarizing Voltage Threshold:............................................. 0 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Characteristic Angle:.............................................................. -90º to +90º in steps of 1º
Block Logic:................................................................................. permission or block selectable by setting
Angle Accuracy: ....................................................................... ±2º for I > 0.1 A and V > 5 Vac
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 30 ms, typically

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-11

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

THERMAL MODEL (49)

Current Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Rated Current:............................................................................for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Alarm Level:.................................................................................1.0% to 110.0% in steps of 0.1%
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Heating Constant: ....................................................................3.0 to 600.0 minutes in steps of 0.1 minutes
Cooling Constant: .....................................................................1.00 to 6.00 times the heating constant, in steps of 0.01
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59P)

Voltage Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor (without harmonics) of phase-to-phase voltages
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.02 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±0.5% of the reading from 0.5 to 10.0 V at nominal frequency
Trip Delay:....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Logic: ..............................................................................................Any/Two/All phases logic, selectable by setting
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (27P)

Voltage Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor of phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages (selectable by
setting)
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.02 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level:............................................................................102% to 103% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±0.5% of the reading from 0.5 to 10.0 V at nominal frequency
Trip Delay:....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Curve Shapes: ............................................................................fixed time or inverse curves
Reset Type: ..................................................................................instantaneous
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):.................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Minimum Voltage Threshold: ..............................................0 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Logic: ..............................................................................................Any/Two/All phases logic, selectable by setting
Supervised by Breaker: .........................................................selectable by setting
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59N)

Voltage Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor of the neutral voltage
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.02 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±0.5% of the reading from 0.5 to 10.0 V at nominal frequency
Trip Delay:....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

2-12 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (47)

Voltage Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.02 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ ±0.5% of the reading from 0.5 to 10.0 V at nominal frequency
Trip Delay: ................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ............................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... ±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... pickup + 0.03 Hz
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ ±0.05 Hz of the reading from 30 to 80 Hz
Trip Delay: ................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ............................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Minimum Voltage Threshold:.............................................. 0.05 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Time Delay Accuracy: ........................................................... 0 to 7 cycles
Operate Time:............................................................................ typically 10 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... pickup - 0.03 Hz
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ ±0.05 Hz of the reading from 30.00 to 80.00 Hz
Trip Delay: ................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ............................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Minimum Voltage Threshold:.............................................. 0.05 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Time Delay Accuracy: ........................................................... 0 to 7 cycles
Operate Time:............................................................................ typically 10 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

FORWARD POWER (32FP)

Current, Voltage: ...................................................................... fundamental phasor (primary values)
Number of Stages:................................................................... 2
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.00 to 10000.00 MW in steps of 0.01 MW
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy for Primary Magnitudes: ..................... ±3% of complete range
Trip Delay (Two Stages):........................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... ±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Block Time After Close: ......................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)

Current, Voltage: ...................................................................... fundamental phasor (primary values)
Number of Stages:................................................................... 2
Pickup Level:............................................................................... -10000.00 to 10000.00 MW (primary values) in steps of 0.01 MW
Characteristic Angle (Two Stages): .................................. 0.00º to 359.99º in steps of 0.01º
Accuracy for Primary Magnitudes: ................................. ±3% of complete range
Trip Delay (Two Stages):........................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... ±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Block Time After Close: ......................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 45 ms at 50 Hz, typically

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-13

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

WATTMETRIC ZERO-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL (32N)

Measured Power:......................................................................zero sequence
Number of Elements: ..............................................................6 (3 high level, 3 low level)
Voltage Pickup Level VN: .......................................................0.02 to 1.00 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Level Accuracy for Voltage:.................................................±0.5% of the reading from 0.5 to 10.0 V at nominal frequency
Current Selection:.....................................................................IN (calculated from phases)
IG (measured from the 4th current transformer)
OC Pickup Level:........................................................................0.002 to 0.400 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT for In
0.002 to 0.400 x CTg in steps of 0.001 x CTg for Ig
Level Accuracy for Current:.................................................±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
OC Pickup Delay: ......................................................................0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Power Pickup Level:.................................................................0.001 to 1.200 x CTVT in steps of 0.001 x CTVT
NOTE: A value of x CTVT is a product of the VT voltage as specified in the VOLTAGE
PICKUP setpoint description of this element, and CT current as specified for the
CURRENT PICKUP setpoint of this element.
Characteristic Angle (MTA): ..................................................0º to 360º in steps of 1º
Power Pickup Delay: ...............................................................0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Level Accuracy for Power: ...................................................±2.5% of the reading at -0.8 ≤ PF ≤ -1 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1
Curve Shapes: ............................................................................Inverse Curve
Definite Time
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curves
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):.................................................0.02 to 2.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Tripping Time Accuracy: .......................................................±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting
Operate Time: ............................................................................< 45 ms at 50 Hz, typically

BROKEN CONDUCTOR (I2/I1)

Pickup Level: ...............................................................................20.0-100.0% (I2/I1 ratio) in steps of 0.1%
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Trip Delay:....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting
Operation Threshold: ..............................................................0 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT

2.5.2 Control
AUTORECLOSE (79)
Schemes: ......................................................................................Single pole and three-pole tripping schemes
Number of Shots:......................................................................Up to 4 reclose attempts per phase before lockout
Dead Time: ..................................................................................Independent dead time setting before each shot
adjustable between 0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s.
Condition Permission:.............................................................Selectable by setting
Condition Time: .........................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Time:..................................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reclaim Time:.............................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Halt Time:.....................................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Coordination Time: ..................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting
Protection settings can be modified after each shot through PLC programming (block signals are available after each shot; AR Halt input,
AR Direct To Lockout, AR coordination, AR Skip counter, AR Phase Shot).

2-14 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SYNCHROCHECK (25)
Dead Source Level:.................................................................. 0.00 to 1.25 x VT (S) in steps of 0.01 x VT
Live Source Level: .................................................................... 0.03 to 1.25 x VT (S) in steps of 0.01 x VT
Dead Load Level:...................................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 x VT (L) in steps of 0.01 x VT
Live Load Level:......................................................................... 0.03 to 1.25 x VT (L) in steps of 0.01 x VT
Maximum Voltage Difference: ........................................... 0.02 to 1.25 x VT (L) in steps of 0.01 x VT
Maximum Angle Difference: ............................................... 2.0º to 80.0º in steps of 0.1º
Maximum Frequency Slip:................................................... 10 to 5000 mHz in steps of 10 mHz
Synchronism Time: ................................................................. 0.01 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Angle Accuracy: ....................................................................... 3º
Dead Source Function:.......................................................... None
Dead Source - Dead Load
Live Source - Dead Load
Dead Source - Live Load
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

FUSE FAILURE
Algorithm based on positive sequence of voltage and current
Activation by V2/V1 ratio

BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)

Current Input:............................................................................. Fundamental phasor
Rated Current: ........................................................................... 1 or 5 A CTs
Trip Mode:.................................................................................... Single-pole or three-pole
Pickup Level for Supervision:.............................................. 0.05 to 20.00 xCT in steps of 0.01 xCT
Pickup Level for High Level: ................................................ 0.05 to 20.00 xCT in steps of 0.01 xCT
Pickup Level for Low Level: ................................................. 0.05 to 20.00 xCT in steps of 0.01 xCT
Pickup Level for Internal Arcing: ....................................... 0.05 to 20.00 xCT in steps of 0.01 xCT
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 95% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... ±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-15

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

CT SUPERVISION FAILURE (60CTS)

Inputs: ............................................................................................Neutral Current I N
Neutral Voltage VN (from three-phase VTs)
Ground Current Ig
Sensitive Ground Current Isg
Time Delay: .................................................................................0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
3IO Level Accuracy:.................................................................0.05 to 2.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
3VO Level Accuracy: ...............................................................0 to 1.25 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Ground Current Inhibit: ..........................................................0.05 to 2.00 x CTg in steps of 0.01 x CTg
Ground Current Accuracy: ...................................................±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
Sensitive Ground Current Accuracy: ...............................±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 16.000 A
Operate Time: ............................................................................< 20 ms at 60 Hz
< 25 ms at 50 Hz
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

SECOND HARMONIC INHIBIT

Operating Parameter: ............................................................2nd harmonic of phase current (ANY ONE, ANY TWO, ALL THREE, AVERAGE)
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.1 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1%
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% of the pickup level or pickup level -0.5%, whichever is greater
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................2% or 10 mA
Minimum Current: ....................................................................0.05 to 2.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Time Delay: .................................................................................0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Time Delay Accuracy:............................................................±3% of expected time or 1.5 cycles (whichever is greater)
Time Accuracy: .........................................................................3% or 1.5 cycles
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

PULSE COUNTERS
Number of Pulse Counters Available: .............................up to 8
Multiplier Factor:.......................................................................0.000 to 65000.000 in steps of 0.001
Overload Factor: .......................................................................0 to 10000000 in steps of 1
Board Origin:...............................................................................all available input/output boards in the device. See order code (F, G, H, J)
Input Origin: ................................................................................up to 32 (depending on board selection type)

ANALOG COMPARATORS
Analog Input: ..............................................................................any analog value in the device
Analog Maximum Threshold Value: .................................-100000.000 to 100000.000 in steps of 0.001
Analog Minimum Threshold Value: ..................................-100000.000 to 100000.000 in steps of 0.001
Analog Delay:.............................................................................0.00 to 900.00 in steps of 0.01
Analog Hysteresis: ...................................................................0.0 to 50.0 in steps of 0.1
Analog Direction (for activation inside or outside the
deadband: .............................................................................. IN or OUT

DIGITAL COUNTERS
Function:.......................................................................................Disabled, Enabled
Name:.............................................................................................any 12 alphanumeric characters
Preset: ............................................................................................-2147483648, 0, +2147483647
Compare:......................................................................................-2147483648, 0, +2147483647

COLD LOAD PICKUP

Cold Outage Time: ...................................................................1 to 1000 minutes in steps of 1 minute
Cold Blocking Time:.................................................................1 to 1000 s in steps of 1 s

2-16 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5.3 Recloser Settings

RECLOSER SETTINGS
Reclose Type:............................................................................. Single-pole, three-pole reclosers
Maximum Interrupting kA:................................................... 0.00 to 999.99 in steps of 0.1 kA
Maximum Number of Openings: ...................................... 0 to 65536 in steps of 1
Maximum Number of Openings in One Hour:............ 0 to 60 in steps of 1
Reclose Wear Monitor Alarm: ............................................ 20 to 100% of total duty factor

SINGLE-POLE / THREE-POLE TRIP LOGIC

Trip Mode:.................................................................................... ONE POLE, THREE POLE
Trip Minimum Seal-in Time: ................................................ 0.02 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Yellow Handle Timer: ............................................................. 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Minimum Current Supervision:.......................................... 0.05 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

SWITCHGEAR
Switchgear:................................................................................. 1 to 16 (configurable in Relay Configuration)
Contacts:...................................................................................... 52a, 52b, 52a+b
Opening Time:........................................................................... 0 to 30000 ms in step of 1 ms
Closing Time: ............................................................................. 0 to 30000 ms in step of 1 ms
Contact A: .................................................................................... 52a configurable input from PLC logic state
Contact B: .................................................................................... 52b configurable input from PLC logic state
Open Text: ................................................................................... Text in Control events for an open condition
Close Text: ................................................................................... Text in Control events for a close condition
Error 00 Text:.............................................................................. Text in Control events for an 00 error state
Error 11 Text:.............................................................................. Text in Control events for an 11 error state
Opening init: ............................................................................... Configurable pulse input that initiates the open process
Closing init:.................................................................................. Configurable pulse input that initiates the close process
Block Open:................................................................................. Configurable input state for blocking open commands
Block Close:................................................................................. Configurable input state for blocking close commands
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... Selectable by setting (for each switchgear, in System Setup)

2.5.4 Monitoring
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum Records: ................................................................. up to 20 oscillography records
Sampling Rate:.......................................................................... programmable to 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 samples per power cycle
Capacity per record:............................................................... (27592 samples)/(number of oscillos x number of samples/cycle)
Maximum Records: ................................................................. up to 20 oscillography records
Trigger Position:........................................................................ 5% to 95% of total length
Trigger:.......................................................................................... programmable via PLC
Data:............................................................................................... 5 current channels and 4 voltage channels up to 16 digital channels programmable
through PLC
Data Storage:............................................................................. non-volatile (flash) memory without battery
Format: ......................................................................................... International Standard COMTRADE ASCII - IEEE C37.111-1999
Automatic Overwrite:............................................................. selectable by setting (oscillography records can be concatenated)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-17

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

FAULT LOCATOR
Method: .........................................................................................single-ended
Positive Sequence Module: ..................................................0.01 to 250.00 Ohm in steps of 0.01 Ohms
Positive Sequence Angle:......................................................25 to 90º in steps of 1º
Zero Sequence Module:.........................................................0.01 to 750.00 Ω in steps of 0.01 Ω
Zero Sequence Angle:.............................................................25 to 90º in steps of 1º
Line Length:.................................................................................0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1 km
Accuracy: .....................................................................................5% (typically)
Show Fault on HMI:..................................................................selectable by setting
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting
Maximum Records:..................................................................up to 10 fault report records
Data: ...............................................................................................Fault date and time, pre-fault currents and voltages, fault currents and voltages, fault
type, distance to the fault (fault location), line parameters, recloser and breaker status
information.
Data Storage: .............................................................................In non-volatile (flash) memory without battery available through communications In
volatile (RAM) memory available through HMI (if selectable by setting)
Format:..........................................................................................text in ASCII format

SNAPSHOT EVENTS
Capacity: ......................................................................................1023 scrolling events
Time-tag: ......................................................................................1 ms using an internal clock of 100 μs
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................1 ms (using IRIG-B synchronization)
Triggers: ........................................................................................any element pickup, dropout, or operation
digital input/output change of state
virtual inputs and control events
Data Storage: .............................................................................non-volatile (flash) memory without battery

CONTROL EVENTS
Capacity: ......................................................................................128 events programmable through PLC
Time-tag: ......................................................................................1 ms plus one PLC cycle using an internal clock of 100 μs. For digital inputs,
the debounce time of these digital inputs must be added.
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................1 ms (with IRIG-B synchronization input)
Trigger: ..........................................................................................Any digital signal programmable through the PLC
Alarm:.............................................................................................Control events can be displayed as an alarm on the alarms panel. Information is
always available through Communications for all models and in the HMI for models
with a graphical display (M in order code).
Data Storage: .............................................................................non-volatile (flash) memory without battery
Control events are also displayed in the snapshot events recording

DEMAND
Channels:......................................................................................9
Parameters:.................................................................................Ia (kA RMS), Ib (kA RMS), Ic (kA RMS), Ig (kA RMS), Isg (kA RMS), I2 (kA), P (MW), Q (MVAr)
and S (MVA)
Current and Power Method: ................................................Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling Demand
Measurements:..........................................................................Each channel shows the present and maximum measured value, with date and time
for the maximum recorded value.
Samples: .......................................................................................5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
Accuracy: .....................................................................................±2%
Trigger Input: ..............................................................................selectable by setting (operation mode selection for the block interval calculation
method)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

DATA LOGGER
Number of Channels:..............................................................1 to 16
Parameters:.................................................................................any available analog actual value
Samples: .......................................................................................1 second, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
Storage Capacity:.....................................................................fixed, 32768 measurements

2-18 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

INTERNAL MONITORING - I/O BOARD TYPE 6

Capacitor Voltage:................................................................... 5 to 165 V
Accuracy ±2% of reading or ±0.2% of full scale
Capacitor Voltage Alarm:..................................................... 80% of voltage setting for external power supply (155 Vdc)
Current Sensors:....................................................................... 3 sensors (one per phase coil)
0 to 30 A
Accuracy ±3% of reading

COIL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION - I/O BOARD TYPE 6

Coil Supervisions:..................................................................... 3 coil supervisions (one per phase)
Load for Coil Supervision: .................................................... 2mA + V/400 kOhm
Operate Time:............................................................................ 100 ms ± 10 ms (normal conditions)
600 ms ± 10 ms (after opening and closing operations)
Reset Delay: ............................................................................... < 10 ms

2.5.5 User-programmable
PLC LOGIC
Programming language: ...................................................... The logical configuration is performed using graphical functions based on the IEC
61131-3 standard.
Lines of code*:........................................................................... 1000 total equations or 15360 bytes, whichever is greater
(*) Note: Reserved Modbus memory space of PLC equations in text format is up to 15360 bytes. This space is shared with information
configured in Enervista at Setpoint > Relay Configuration. According to this, the number of PLC equations can be limited by values
configured on that section.
Supported operations: .......................................................... NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 8 inputs), AND (2 to 8 inputs), NOR (2 to 8 inputs),
NAND (2 to 8 inputs), Latch (Reset Dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers, Analog
Operators.
2 inputs default gates, from 3 to 8 inputs provided in library format.
Libraries:....................................................................................... Logical gates fully programmable by user. Used to create user-programmable logic to
be distributed as a single object.
Inputs:............................................................................................ any logical variable, contact or virtual input
Number of Timers: .................................................................. 8 maximum in each logic scheme (provided in library format)

FLEXCURVES
Number: ....................................................................................... 4 (A through D)
Reset Points:............................................................................... 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate Point: ........................................................................... 80 (0 through 20 of pickup)
Time Delay:................................................................................. 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 ms
Saturation Level: ...................................................................... 20 x the pickup level

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Number: ....................................................................................... 15 configurable LEDs plus the Ready non-configurable LED
Programmability:..................................................................... any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Reset Mode:................................................................................ self-reset or latched.
The first 5 LEDs (red) are latched by hardware, usually configured for trip signals.
The following 10 LEDs (yellow and green) are self-reset but can be latched through PLC
configuration.
Reset Signal:............................................................................... The LEDs can be reset by hardware, pressing the front “esc” key for more than 3
seconds or using the LED reset signal through PLC configuration.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-19

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of Configurable Displays:...................................1: one line diagram fully configurable. In graphical displays only
Number of Fixed Displays: ...................................................6: Metering (selectable between Primary and Secondary values), Snapshot Events (all
and new), Alarms, Inputs and Outputs screen with test functionality for inputs and
outputs. (In graphical displays only.)
Number of Selectable Displays:.........................................2: Logotype, Metering, or both in scrolling mode can be selected as the default screen
in text display for all models (basic and mimic). The metering screen contains current
and voltages for phases and ground in primary or secondary values.

USER-PROGRAMMABLE FRONT KEYS

Number of Configurable Keys: ..........................................5
Operation: ....................................................................................Drive PLC operands

2.5.6 Metering
CURRENT
Accuracy (at nominal frequency): ....................................±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A (for phases and ground)
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 5 A (for sensitive ground)
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
% of Load-to-trip Accuracy: ................................................±0.5% of full-scale

VOLTAGE
Accuracy: .....................................................................................±0.5% of reading from 0.5 to 10.0 V at nominal frequency

REAL POWER (WATTS)

Accuracy: .....................................................................................±2.0% of the reading at -0.8 ≤ PF ≤ -1.0 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0

REACTIVE POWER (VARS)

Accuracy: .....................................................................................±2.0% of the reading at -0.2 ≤ PF ≤ 0.2

APPARENT POWER (VA)

Accuracy: .....................................................................................±2.0% of the reading

WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Accuracy: .....................................................................................±2.0% of the reading
Range:............................................................................................-2147483 to +2147483 MWh
Parameters:.................................................................................3-phase only
Update Rate:...............................................................................100 ms

WAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Accuracy: .....................................................................................±2.0% of the reading
Range:............................................................................................-2147483 to +2147483 MVArh
Parameters:.................................................................................3-phase only
Update Rate:...............................................................................100 ms

FREQUENCY
Accuracy: .....................................................................................+/- 0.03Hz
From 30 to 80 Hz
Note: Voltage input must be above 0.500 V to start measuring frequency.

ANGLE
Accuracy: .....................................................................................±3º

2-20 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5.7 Inputs
AC CURRENT INPUTS
CT Ratio: ....................................................................................... 1.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1
Rated Currents:......................................................................... Appropriate for 1 or 5 A. R650 has universal range for CT (valid for 1 or 5 A to only one
terminal).
Relay Burden: ............................................................................ < 8 mVA at 1 A
< 200 mVA at 5 A VA
Input Impedance: .................................................................... < 8 mOhm
Current Withstand:.................................................................. Continuous at 20 A
1 s at 500 A for phases and ground
1 s at 50 A for sensitive ground

LEA VOLTAGE INPUTS

Number of inputs:.................................................................... 6
Secondary Range:................................................................... 0.5 to 10 V
Ratio:.............................................................................................. 1.0 to 10000.0 in steps of 0.1
Nominal Frequency:............................................................... 50/60 Hz
Minimum input impedance:................................................ 1 MOhm
Accuracy:..................................................................................... ±1.00% of reading or ±1 V whichever is greater
Magnitude Correction factor: ............................................ ±15.0% in steps of 0.1%
Phase Angle correction factor:.......................................... 0 to 359.9º in steps of 0.1º
Voltage withstand:................................................................... VAC continuous

PHASE CURRENT INPUTS

Number of inputs:.................................................................... 3
Range: ........................................................................................... 0.05 to 160 A primary
Input type:................................................................................... Combined 1 A / 5 A
Ratio:.............................................................................................. 1.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1
Frequency: .................................................................................. 50 or 60 Hz
Accuracy:..................................................................................... 0.05 to 8.00 x CT ±0.5% of reading or ±1% rated current (whichever is greater)
Resolution:................................................................................... 0.1 A

GROUND/SENSITIVE CURRENT INPUT

Number of inputs: ................................................................... 1
Range: ........................................................................................... 0.005 to 160 A primary
Input type:................................................................................... Combined 0.2A / 1A / 5A
Ratio:.............................................................................................. 1.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1
Frequency: .................................................................................. 50 or 60 Hz
Accuracy:..................................................................................... 0.05 to 8.00 x CT ±0.5% of reading or ±1% rated current (whichever is greater)
Resolution:................................................................................... 0.01 A

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-21

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

CONTACT INPUTS - I/O BOARD TYPE 1 AND 2

Input Activation Threshold:..................................................10 to 230 Vdc in steps of 1 V (selectable by setting)
Impedance: .................................................................................> 100 kΩ
Maximum Error: ........................................................................±10% setting or ± 5 V
Load for Voltage Supervision Inputs: ..............................2 mA + V/100 kΩ
Voltage Threshold for Voltage Supervision Inputs:...< 10 V (fixed)
Debounce Time:........................................................................1 to 50 ms in steps of 1 ms
Recognition Time: ....................................................................2 ms (typical)
Timing Resolution: ...................................................................1 ms
For Activation Voltage Threshold and Debounce Time there is a single setting for all inputs in the same group (all inputs sharing the same
common).
Input Type and Delay Input Time are not grouped; there is a different setting for each input.
Input Type:...................................................................................positive-edge/negative-edge/positive/negative
Delay Input Time: .....................................................................0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms (input signal time delay)

CONTACT INPUTS - I/O BOARD TYPE 6

Number of Inputs: ....................................................................6
Input Activation Threshold:..................................................10 to 230 Vdc in steps of 1 V (selectable by setting for wet input configuration)
Impedance: .................................................................................> 100 kΩ
Maximum Error: ........................................................................±10% setting or ± 5 V
Debounce Time:........................................................................1 to 50 ms in steps of 1 ms
Recognition Time: ....................................................................2 ms (typical)
Timing Resolution: ...................................................................1 ms
For Activation Voltage Threshold and Debounce Time there is a single setting for all inputs in the same group (all inputs sharing the same
common).
Input Type and Delay Input Time are not grouped; there is a different setting for each input.
Digital Input Contact: ..............................................................Dry type / Wet type
Input Type:...................................................................................Positive-edge / Negative-edge / Positive / Negative
Delay Input Type: .....................................................................0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Wetting Voltage: .......................................................................+24 Vdc

REMOTE INPUTS (IEC61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Number of Input Devices:.....................................................32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
Number f Remote Devices: ..................................................24
Default States on Loss of Comms: ...................................On, Off, Latest/on, Latest/off

ANALOG INPUTS
Input Impedance: .....................................................................116Ω
Current Input (mADC):.............................................................0 to -1; 0 to +1; -1 to +1; 0 to 5; 0 to 10; 0 to 20; 4 to 20 (programmable)
Conversion Range:...................................................................-1 to +20 mA
Accuracy: .....................................................................................±0.2% of full scale
Type: ...............................................................................................passive

IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude Modulation: ..........................................................DC SHIFT = demodulated input (no carrier)
Input Voltage: .............................................................................TTL
Input Burden:..............................................................................1.5 mA
Input Impedance: .....................................................................3.3 kΩ
Minimum Input Voltage: ........................................................2.4 V
Maximum Input Voltage:.......................................................± 24 V
Formats:........................................................................................B000 (*) B001, B002 and B003 (*
(*) Signal combinations recognized in accordance with IRIG Standard 200-95
Isolation: .......................................................................................2 kV

2-22 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5.8 Real time clock

Accuracy:..................................................................................... typical ±20 ppm
Backup Energy:......................................................................... more than 1 week

2.5.9 Outputs
OUTPUTS - I/O BOARD TYPE 1 AND 2
Single Contact Carry continuous: .................................... 16 A
Make and Carry for 1 s: ........................................................ 60 A
Break at L/R of 40 ms: ........................................................... 0.3 A DC max. at 125 Vdc
0.25 A DC max. at 250 Vdc
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 8 ms
Contact Material: ..................................................................... silver alloy
Output Logic Type, Output Type and Pulse Output Time are selectable by setting for each output
Output Logic Type:.................................................................. positive/negative
Output Type: .............................................................................. normal/pulse/latch (selectable by setting for each output)
Pulse Output Time:.................................................................. 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms (applicable only to signals sent as pulse type)
Separate operate and reset signals can be configured by any digital signal programmable through the PLC
Contact Outputs (F31-F33, F34-F36) for board type
2 (supervision) in slot F:.................................................... The current seal-in circuit is used for verifying the current condition in a circuit during
the time that the tripping contact remains closed. If the current in the tripping circuit is
maintained over 500 mA, the function is sealed independently of the status of the
function that caused the trip.

COIL ACTUATOR OUTPUTS - I/O BOARD TYPE 6

Number of Coil Actuators: ................................................... 3 (one per phase)
Close Pulse Time: ..................................................................... 15 to 100 ms (65 ms default)
Open Pulse Time: ..................................................................... 15 to 100 ms (30 ms default)
Open Maximum Current:...................................................... 5 to 30 A (10 A default)
Close Maximum Current:...................................................... 5 to 30 A (15 A default)
Current Withstand:.................................................................. 1 s at 60 A
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 1 ms

REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Standard Output Points: ....................................................... 32
User Output Points:................................................................. 32

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-23

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.5.10 Control power supply

LOW RANGE (LO) ALL RANGES

Nominal DC Voltage: 24 to 48 V Power Consumption: Typical =25 VA, Maximum =45 VA
Min/Max DC Voltage 19.2 / 57.6 V Display backlight auto power-off mode after 15 minutes without touching
Note: Low range is DC only any key, in order to ensure long life and
minimum consumption
Voltage Loss hold-up time:(*) 24 Vdc 30 ms
48 Vdc 100 ms
(*) These figures have been calculated for models with the following characteristic:
- IEC Symbols Graphic display
- Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2: PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX+ Redundant 100 Base FX
- F and G I/O Board:
Slot F: 8 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs + 2 Trip / Close circuit supervision circuits
Slot G: 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs

HIGH RANGE (HI) INTERNAL FUSE

Nominal DC Voltage: 110 to 250 V V: 250 VAC
Min/Max DC Voltage 88 / 300 V I: 2.5A
Nominal AC Voltage: 120 to 230 V Size: 5 x 20 mm
Min/Max AC Voltage: 102 / 250 V Type: Quick acting (F)
Voltage Loss Hold-up Time: 200 ms typical UL listed miniature Fuse
100 ms worst case

2.5.11 Communications

FRONT PORT:
Front port: COM2
Type: RS232/USB
Baud Rate: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 baud
Default Baud Rate: 19200 baud
Protocols: ModBus® RTU/DNP 3.0
Typical Distance: 3m
Isolation: 2 kV
ASYNCHRONOUS REAR PORTS:
None or two rear ports (depending on model): COM1, COM2 (rear COM2 multiplexed with front port)
Type (depending on model):
Model F None
Model A Redundant RS485
Model X Redundant RS485 + fiber CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model P Redundant 1mm-plastic F.O.
Model Y Redundant 1mm-plastic F.O. + fiber CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model G Redundant multimode glass F.O.
Model Z Redundant multimode glass F.O. + fiber CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model C Cable CAN port for I/O module
Model M Cable CAN port for I/O module (cable) + RS485 (ModBus RTU)
Optic Features for ST Connector Devices: Wave length: 1300nm
Fiber type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Baud Rate: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 baud
Default Baud Rate: 19200 baud
Protocols: ModBus® RTU/DNP 3.0/IEC103
Typical Distance: 1200 m for cooper cable, 1000 m for glass fiber and 50 m for plastic fiber

2-24 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Isolation: 2 kV
CAN PORT:
Rear Port: CAN port in models C, M, X, Y, Z for asynchronous rear ports
Type: Multimode glass F.O. port with ST connectors
Fiber Wavelength: 820 nm
Fiber Type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Maximum Recommended Length: 300 m for cooper cable and glass fiber
Isolation: 2 kV
ETHERNET PORT:
Rear port:
For models J, K, L, M: ETH_E/ ETH_A/ ETH_B
Type (depending on model):
Model J: PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
Model K: PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
Model L: PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base TX
Model M: PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base TX
(*) Note: This Ethernet port (ETH_E) is intended only for maintenance purposes.
10/100BaseTX: RJ45 connector
100BaseFX: ST connectors
Wavelength: 1300 nm
Fiber Type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Protocols: ModBus® TCP/IP
DNP over TCP/IP and UDP/IP
IEC 61850
http, ftp, tftp (allow the use of a standard Internet browser)
Typical Distance: 1000 m for glass fiber and 150 m for RJ45 cable
Response Time to ModBus Commands: 10 ms typical
Isolation: 2 kV
Two witness LEDs for transmission and reception are included
SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL (SNTP)
Clock Synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (PTP)
PTP IEEE Std 1588 2008 (version 2)
Power Profile (PP) per IEEE Standard PC37.238TM2011
Slave-only ordinary clock
Peer delay measurement mechanism
PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP) (IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 4, 2012)
Ethernet ports: A and B
Networks: 10/100 MB Ethernet
PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (HSR) (IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 5, 2012)
Ethernet ports: A and B
Networks: 10/100 MB Ethernet
RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL (RSTP) (IEC 62439-1, IEEE 801.2D)
Ethernet ports: A and B
Networks: 10/100 MB Ethernet

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-25

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.5.12 Optical
Wave length: 1300 nm
Connector types: ST package style
Fiber type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm

Transmitter characteristics
Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit Reference
Output Optical Power BOL -19 -14 dBm avg. Note 1
62.5/125 μm, NA = 0.275 Fiber EOL -20
Output Optical Power BOL -22.5 -14 dBm avg. Note 1
50/125 μm, NA = 0.275 Fiber EOL -23.5
Output Optical Power at -45 dBm avg. Note 2
Logic “0” State

Receiver characteristics
Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit Reference
Input Optical Power -33.9 -31 dBm avg. Note 3
Minimum at Window Edge
Input Optical Power -35.2 -31.8 dBm avg. Note 4
Minimum at Eye Center
Input Optical Power Maximum -14 dBm avg. Note 3

Notes:
1. These optical power values are measured with the following conditions:
The Beginning of Live (BOL) to the End of Life (EOL) optical power degradation is typically 1.5 dB per industry
convention for long wavelength LEDs. The actual degradation observed in Agilent’s 1300nm LED products is <1 dB, as
specified in this data sheet.
Over the specified operating voltage and temperature ranges.
With HALT Line State, (12.5 MHz square-wave), input signal.
At the end of one meter of noted optical fiber with cladding modes removed.
The average power value can be converted to a peak power value by adding 3 dB. Higher output optical power
transmitters are available on special request.
2. The transmitter provides compliance with the need for Transmit_Disable commands from the FDDI SMT layer by
providing an Output Optical Power level of <-45 dBm average in response to a logic “0” input. This specification
applies to either 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm fiber cables.
3. This specification is intended to indicate the performance of the receiver section of the transceiver when Input Optical
Power signal characteristics are present per the following definitions. The Input Optical Power dynamic range from
the minimum level (with a window time-width) to the maximum level is the range over which the receiver is
guaranteed to provide output data with a Bit Error Ratio (BER) better than or equal to 2.5e-10.
At the Beginning of Life (BOL).
Over the specified operating temperature and voltage ranges.
4. All conditions for Note 3 apply except that the measurement is made at the center of the symbol with no window
time-width.

2-26 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5.13 Environmental
Operating Temperature:....................................................... - 40°C to + 60°C
Storage Temperature: ........................................................... - 40°C to + 85°C
Humidity (non-condensing): ............................................... 95%
Altitude: ........................................................................................ up to 2000 m
Class of Equipment: ................................................................ I
Equipment Mobility:................................................................ fixed
Overvoltage Category:.......................................................... III
Pollution Degree:...................................................................... 2

2.5.14 Packaging and weight

Net Weight:................................................................................. 5 kg
Packaged Weight: ................................................................... 6 kg
Package Dimensions:............................................................. 30 x 40 x 40 cm (D x W x H)

2.5.15 Type tests

CATEGORY STANDARD CLASS TEST

Dielectric voltage withstand IEC60255-27 2 KV / 2.3 KV
SAFETY Impulse voltage withstand IEC60255-27 5 KV
Insulation resistance IEC60255-27 500 V (test level)
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-2 Level 4
Radiated RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-3 Level 3
Electrical Fast Transient Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-4 Zone A
Surge Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-5 Zone A
Conducted RF Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-6 Level 3
Power magnetic Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-8 Level 5
EMC Power Frequency Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-16 Zone A
Damped Oscillatory Wave Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-18 2.5 KV Common Mode 1 KV Diff. Mode
Voltage Dips & Interruptions IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-11/ Levels based on IEC61000-4-11 &
IEC61000-4-29 IEC61000-4-29
Ripple on DC IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-17 15% Rated DC value
Radiated & Conducted Emissions IEC60255-26/CISPR11/ Class A
CISPR22
Sinusoidal Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock & Bump IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
MECHANICAL
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 2
Enclosure Protection IEC60255-27/IEC60529 IP52
Cold test (storage) IEC60068-2-1 -40˚C 16 hrs
Cold test (operational) IEC60068-2-1 -20˚C 16 hrs
Dry heat test (storage) IEC60068-2-2 85˚C 16 hrs
CLIMATIC Dry heat test (operational) IEC60068-2-2 60˚C 16 hrs
Change of Temperature IEC60068-2-14 5 cycles (3+3) -20˚C/60˚C
Damp Heat Humidity Cyclic IEC60068-2-30 6 cycles (12+12) 55˚C @ 93% R.H.
Damp Heat steady state IEC60068-2-78 40˚C @ 93% R.H.

Type test report available upon request.

R650 has been designed to comply with the highest existing requirements. More specifically, UNIPEDE recommendations
for high voltage substations are followed, even if for most applications such high classes are not required.
The relay complies with ANSI C37.90 standards, and has been designed to comply with international standards.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-27

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.5.16 Approvals

APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO

CE COMPLIANCE Low voltage directive IEC60255-27
EMC Directive IEC60255-26
ISO Manufactured under a registered quality program ISO9001

2-28 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.6 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

2.6 External connections

Figure 2-2: R650 wiring diagram (189C4216)

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 2-29

2.6 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

INPUTS / OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION FOR BOARDS F1 AND F2

SLOT F CONFIGURATION (BOARD TYPE 1)
INPUTS F1 OUTPUTS F1
F1 + CC1 52b F19
F2 + CC2 50P BLOCK O1 F20 79 BLOCK
F3 + CC3 51P BLOCK F21

USER CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS

USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS
F4 + CC4 67P BLOCK F22
F5 + CC5 50G BLOCK O2 F23 27/59 PICKUP
F6 + CC6 51G BLOCK F24
F7 + CC7 79 INITIATE F25
O3 50/67G PICKUP
F8 + CC8 79 BLOCK F26
F9 - COMMON 1/8 COMMON 1/8 F27
O4 51/67G PICKUP
F10 - COMMON 9/16 COMMON 9/16 F28
F11 + CC9 NOT USED F29
O5 50/67P PICKUP
F12 + CC10 NOT USED F30
F13 + CC11 NOT USED F31
O6 51/67P PICKUP
F14 + CC12 NOT USED F32
F15 + CC13 NOT USED F33
O7 RECLOSE
F16 + CC14 NOT USED F34
F17 + CC15 NOT USED F35
O8 TRIP
F18 + CC16 NOT USED F36

SLOT F CONFIGURATION (BOARD TYPE 2)

INPUTS F2 OUTPUTS F2
F1 + COIL 1 F19
52/a SUPERVISION O1 79 BLOCK
COIL 1
V

F2 - 52/a F20
F3 + COIL 1 F21
52/b SUPERVISION O2 27/59 PICKUP
V

USER CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS

F4 - 52/b F22
F5 + CC1 52b F23
O3 50/67G PICKUP
USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

F6 + CC2 50P BLOCK F24

F7 + CC3 51P BLOCK F25
O4 51/67G PICKUP
F8 + CC4 67P BLOCK F26
F9 - COMMON 1/4 COMMON 1/4 F27
O5 50/67P PICKUP
F10 - COMMON 5/8 COMMON 5/8 F28
F11 + CC5 50G BLOCK F29
O6 51/67P PICKUP
F12 + CC6 51G BLOCK F30
F13 + CC7 79 INITIATE I SENS F31
I

F14 + CC8 79 BLOCK F32 RECLOSE

O7
F15 + COIL 2 F33
V

52/a SUPERVISION
COIL 2

F16 - 52/a I SENS F34

I

F17 + COIL 2 F35 TRIP

52/b SUPERVISION O8
V

F18 - 52/b F36

Figure 2-3: Input/output configurations for boards F1 and F2 (189C4216H1)

2-30 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

GE
Grid Solutions

R650 Recloser Controller

Chapter 3: Hardware

HARDWARE

3.1 Module description

High Speed serial CAN Bus

CPU Digital Optional Power

Transformer
Module Module I/O Digital Supply
I/O
LEAs
and
CTs

SCREEN

Keypad
LEDs

23
322
2
RUSB
S Local/
Remote

Figure 3-1: Block diagram

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 3-1

3.1 MODULE DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

R650 units incorporate the following modules:

• Power supply, which can be simple or redundant, depending on the selected model
• Front module with alphanumerical (4 x 20) or optional graphical (16 x 40 characters) display. It includes the bus on
its rear, which communicates with the rest of modules via a high speed CAN bus.
• Transformer module with 5 current transformers and 6 LEA voltage inputs.
• CPU including a powerful DSP for measure processing as well as synchronous and asynchronous communication
accessories.
• Input/Output module included in basic unit
• Optionally, a second I/O module can be added.

3-2 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.2 POWER SUPPLY

3.2 Power supply

R650 can incorporate a simple or redundant power supply. The main and backup modules are identical.

Control power supplied to the relay must be connected to the matching power supply range of the
NOTICE relay. If the voltage is applied to the wrong terminals, damage can occur.

The R650 relay contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to be subject to
NOTICE deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by
powering the relays up once a year.
In the case of a redundant power supply the two modules work in parallel continuously, distributing 50% of the load on
each, thus ensuring greater reliability and an instantaneous load transfer from a failed power supply to the backup,
without loss of time or module reset.
A contact relay connected to the low voltage side of the power supply monitors this voltage. The three contact terminals,
normally open, common, and normally closed, are available at the external connector terminals. The contact monitors the
power supply integrity and it is not controlled by the main microprocessor. In order to monitor whether the unit is ready to
protect (READY), an auxiliary output contacts in the unit should be programmed. This “fly-back” type power supply
provides high efficiency, stability and reliability and is available in two ranges, Hi and Low, in order to optimize efficiency
and general performance, including the capability to tolerate auxiliary voltage interruptions (dips).

The contact terminals on the power supply should connect to the same circuit used to power on
WARNING the relay.
Oversized components highly resistant to temperature are used. For example, all capacitors are specified to stand up to
105ºC, transformer components are specially designed to stand up to 180ºC, the MOSFET transistor has very low
resistance, supports high voltage and is refrigerated by an oversized heat sink. This allows temperatures over the 60ºC
shown in the Technical Characteristics section, and prolonged overloads such as those occurring at batteries in deep
charge mode (much higher than +15% voltage shown in the Technical Characteristics section).
High capacitance capacitors are also used, providing high tolerance to prolonged dips, 100ms, even in the most
unfavorable consumption conditions. This allows the relay to continue operating normally without undesired resets
leaving protection features offline.

In the case of a blown fuse, replacement should be conducted by authorized/trained personnel

CAUTION only. Use replacement fuses with the same characteristics.
Fuse Requirements:
V: 250 VAC
I: 2.5A
Size: 5 x 20 mm
Type: Quick acting (F)
UL listed miniature fuse
Note: Contact technical support for further guidance.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 3-3

3.3 DRIVING ELECTRONICS BOARD CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

3.3 Driving electronics board

The driving electronics board provides a glueless connectivity between the R650 device and G&W Electric Viper-ST
reclosers, without any external auxiliary driver devices. The R650 is only compatible with the Viper-ST.
The main characteristics of this board are:
• 3x Coil Circuit Supervision (one per phase)
• 8 dry/wet configurable digital inputs (DI)
• 24 Vdc wetting voltage
• Dl activation voltage threshold from 10 to 230 VDC
• DI configurable debouncing time from 1 to 50 ms
• DI time recognition of 2 ms
• Voltage capacitor supervision
• 3x coil solid state directional outputs drivers
• Configurable close and open pulse delays
• Configurable maximum output currents for opening and closing commands
The external connections of the driving electronics board are shown below:

F1 + CC1 F19 COIL A1

USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

F2 + CC2 F20 COIL A2

F3 + CC3 F21

OUTPUTS
F4 + CC4 F22 COIL B1
F5 + CC5 F23 COIL B2
F6 + CC6 F24
F7 + CC7 F25 COIL C1
F8 + CC8 F26 COIL C2
F9 - COMMON F27
F10 + 24 VDC F28
F11 F29
F12 F30
F13 F31 + PS
F14 F32 - PS
INPUTS

F15 F33 + CAP1

F16 F34 + CAP2
F17 F35 - CAP1
F18 F36 - CAP2

OPEN CLOSE
COIL A/B/C1
+ COIL A/B/C1
-

M M
- +
COIL A/B/C2 COIL A/B/C2

Figure 3-2: Driving electronics board external connections

3-4 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.3 DRIVING ELECTRONICS BOARD

The next drawing shows an example of the wiring connection of the driving electronics board (F6) to the Viper-ST recloser.
Different configurations of CC inputs are also allowed, with the logic assignment configuration of the contact input CC1 / 8
set in the EnerVista 650 Setup software. (Setpoint -> Inputs/Outputs -> Contact I/O -> Board F; see 5.6.2 Control settings
for input/output.)

52a
F1 + CC1
USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

F2 + CC2
52b
F3 + CC3
F4 + CC4
52c
F5 + CC5
F6 + CC6
F7 + CC7
F8 + CC8 69_1
F9 - COMMON
F10 + 24 VDC 69_2
Wetting Voltage
F11 Viper-ST
69_3
F12
F13
F14 Low SF6
F15
Loss Vac
F16
Power
F17
F18
F19 COIL A1
F20 COIL A2
F21 69_1
F22 COIL B1 Open
OUTPUTS

R650 F23 COIL B2 Coil 1

F24 Close
F25 COIL C1
69_2
F26 COIL C2 Open
F27
Coil 2
F28
F29 Close

F30 69_3
Open
F31 + PS
F32 - PS Coil 3
INPUTS

F33 + CAP1 Close

F34 + CAP2
F35 - CAP1
F36 - CAP2

+155 VDC

CAP1 CAP2
+ +

Figure 3-3: Wiring connections, Driving Electronics board to Viper-ST

3.3.1 Configurable digital inputs

The driving electronics board has 8 digital inputs, CC1 to CC8, that are left fully configurable and without a fixed default
configuration. These inputs are configured using the EnerVista 650 Setup software (Setpoints > Inputs/Outputs >
Contact I/O > Board F).
The activation voltage threshold can be selected from 10 to 230 VDC. The driving electronics board also provides a wetting
voltage of 24 Vdc. Two possible external connections are provided: Wet connection and dry connection.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 3-5

3.3 DRIVING ELECTRONICS BOARD CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

3.3.1.1 Wet connection

To use a wet connection, the setting 'Digital Input Contact' should be set to 'Wet Type'. In this configuration, the contact
input is fed by an external DC voltage. The setting 'Input activation voltage threshold' provides the minimum voltage to
detect the input as activated. An example of the external connection for this configuration is depicted below:

52a
F1 + CC1
USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

F2 + CC2 52b External VDC Battery.

F3 + CC3 Range: 20 – 235 VDC

F4 + CC4 52c
F5 + CC5
F6 + CC6
F7 + CC7
F8 + CC8
F9 - COMMON
F10 + 24 VDC

Figure 3-4: Wet type external connection

3.3.1.2 Dry connection

To use a dry connection, the setting 'Digital Input Contact' should be set to 'Dry Type'. In this configuration, the setting
'voltage threshold' is not taken into account. An internal reference threshold of 20 Vdc is set by default, and is exclusively
applicable for the driving electronics board. The R650 can also be provided with another auxiliary contact/input board with
its own settings.
Thus, in order to use the dry connection for the auxiliary board, the commons of the board should be connected together
with the common of the driving electronics, and the Threshold setting of the auxiliary board should be set at 20 Vdc
manually. The connections between cards are depicted below.

52a
F1 + CC1
USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

F2 + CC2 52b
F3 + CC3
F4 + CC4 52c
F5 + CC5
F6 + CC6
F7 + CC7
F8 + CC8
F9 - COMMON
F10 + 24 VDC

G1 + CC1
USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

G2 + CC2
G3 + CC3
G4 + CC4
G5 + CC5
G6 + CC6
G7 + CC7
G8 + CC8
G9 - COMMON 1/8

G10 - COMMON 9/18

G11 + CC9
USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

G12 + CC10
G13 + CC11
G14 + CC12
G15 + CC13
G16 + CC14
G17 + CC15
G18 + CC16

3-6 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.4 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

3.4 Mechanical description

The model number and electrical characteristics of the unit are indicated on the label located on the right side of the relay
case.
The metallic case of the unit is highly resistant to corrosion. It is made of stainless steel (AISI 430), coated with an epoxy
layer. The rest of the metallic pieces are covered with a high quality resistive coating that has successfully passed at least
96 hours in the salt spray chamber (S/N ASTM B-117).
The front of the relay is made of a thermoplastic, flame retardant (V0, UL94), highly resistive material, which guarantees
the unit’s immunity to all kinds of EMI/RFI/ESD interferences. There is also an IP52 (IEC 529) protection rating against dust
and water through the front and with the relay mounted in the panel.

3.4.1 Mounting
The unit is designed for semi-flush mounting. The relay is secured to the panel with the 4 M6 screws provided with the unit.
The front keypad, display, and communications port are easily access on the front of the unit. The wiring is at the rear of
the unit. Drilling dimensions are shown on Figure 3-6: Cutout and drilling dimensions

Figure 3-5: Panel mount

The relay width allows the mounting of two units on a standard 19’’ panel, 8 units high.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 3-7

3.4 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

1.10 (28) 6.80 (172,8)

0.75 (19,1) 9.33 (237)

10.26 (260,7)

10.48 (266,3)
8.39±0.039 (213±1)

0.47 (12) 7.44 (189) 0.47 (12)

4xØ0.27 (7)
10.36 (263)

7.5 (190,5)

Figure 3-6: Cutout and drilling dimensions

3-8 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.4 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

Figure 3-7: 19” rack dimensions 8U high for two relays

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 3-9

3.4 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

3.4.2 Rear description

Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed
WARNING from the unit.
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static wrap) must be used when coming in
contact with products while the relay is energized.
The relay is wired through the terminal blocks located at the rear of the unit.
The magnetic module, which receives the CT secondary currents and the metering voltages, incorporates a very robust
terminal board (columns A and B) The maximum tightening torque for the screws on terminal boards A and B is 1.2 Nm.
Current inputs provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits. The maximum recommended cable section for this
terminal board, with the appropriate terminal, is 6 mm2 (AWG 10).
The use of twisted pair wire and/or shielded is recommended for the CT secondary current Isg.
The rest of the terminal blocks, incorporate high quality connectors with the capacity to withstand a rated current of 15 A
at 300 V. These terminal blocks admit a cable section of up to 2.54 mm2 (AWG 12).
The relay should be connected directly to the ground bus, using the shortest practical path. A tinned copper, braided,
shielding and bonding cable should be used. As a minimum, 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used.
The communication boards have different types of connector depending on the selected media: RS485, glass or plastic
fiber optic.

G F
H
PS2 1 1
1 +/L 2 2
2 3 3
3 4 4
4 5 5
6 6
B A
5 IA VLA
6 7 7
8 8
1 1
7
8 9 9
9 +/N 10 10 2 2
11 11 VLB
IB
12 12 3 3
13 13
14 14
15 15 4 4
16 16 IC VLC
17 17 5 5
18 18
G F 6 6
VSA
G F 7 7
H
PS1 19 19
10 +/L 20 20 8 8
11 21 21 IG VSB
12 22 22 9 9
13 23 23
14 24 24
15 25 25 10 10
16 26 26 VSC
ISG
17 27 27 11 11
18 +/N 28 28
29 29
12 12
30 30
31 31
B A
32 32
33 33
34 34
H 35 35
IRIG B
36 36
19 +
20 - G F

Figure 3-8: Connector locations

3-10 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.4 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

TYPE OF COMMUNICATION CONNECTOR

RS485 / CAN cable Plug-in, 3 poles.
IRIG B Plug-in, 2 poles.

Plastic fiber optic Versatile Link

Ethernet 10/100 UTP (10/100BaseTX) RJ45, Class 5.

Glass fiber optic (100BaseFX) ST

Ethernet 100 FX (100BaseFX) ST
CAN Fiber ST

Figure 3-9: Communications media selector guide

Communication boards are installed at the rear part of the unit, the upper port being reserved for the asynchronous
communications board and CAN, and the lower port for the Ethernet board in any of its configurations.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 3-11

3.4 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

Figure 3-10: Detail of insertion/extraction of communication modules

Note: For R650, only the serial card can be removed

The transformer module housing the CTs is already connected to a female connector screwed to
WARNING the case that incorporates shorting bars in the current inputs, so that it can be extracted
without the need to short-circuit the currents externally. It is very important, for safety reasons,
not to change or switch the terminals for CTs and voltage inputs.
A grounded antistatic wristband must be used when manipulating the module in order to avoid electrostatic discharges
that may cause damage to the electronic components

Special care is required when disconnecting CT wire leads from the terminal block.
WARNING A high voltage potential can occur if a wire is disconnected while a CT is energized.
CT isolation or de-energization is required prior to CT terminal wire removal.

3-12 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.5 WIRING

3.5 Wiring
3.5.1 External connections
R650 units can have different options for slot F:
Option 1: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 outputs.
Option 2: Board with 8 digital inputs, 4 circuit supervision inputs, 6 conventional outputs, and two current sensing
outputs
Option 4: Board with 32 digital inputs.
Option 5: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 analog inputs.
Option 6: Board with 8 digital inputs and 3 outputs for the G&W Viper-ST recloser.
For slot G there are five different options:
Option 0: No board
Option 1: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 outputs.
Option 4: Board with 32 digital inputs.
Option 5: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 analog inputs.
Note: Slot F option 4 requires slot G option 4 or option 5. Slot F option 5 requires slot G option 5.

3.5.2 Digital inputs with trip circuit supervision

The Option 2 I/O board includes two groups of 4 inputs with one common, in terminals F9 to F10. It also includes 6 auxiliary
outputs, in terminals F19 to F30 with normally open contacts and two current sensing (latching) outputs (F31-F33 and F34-
F36).
Besides, there are 2 groups of inputs for trip circuit supervision. The first group includes two isolated digital inputs,
terminals F1-F2 and F3-F4. The second group, symmetrical and identical to the first, is formed by isolated voltage inputs
F15-F16 and F17-F18.
Using voltage detectors and current sensing, it is possible to implement several trip or close circuit supervision schemes, as
well as protection of the unit output contact.

In order to implement these schemes, it is not necessary to perform any setting in the unit.
NOTICE Internal functions are always operative. A detailed description of trip circuit supervision is
included in chapter 5 in this manual.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 3-13

3.6 TRANSCEIVER OPTICAL POWER BUDGET VS. LINK LENGTH CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

3.6 Transceiver optical power budget vs. link length

Optical Power Budget (OPB) is the available optical power for a fiber optic link to accommodate fiber cable losses plus
losses due to in-line connectors, splices, and optical switches. OPB also provides a margin for link aging and unplanned
losses due to cable plant reconfiguration and repair.

OPB (dB) Fiber optic Cable length

(km)
62.5/125 μm 50/125 μm
11.4 8 0
10.9 7.4 0.3
10.5 7.1 0.5
9.6 6.2 1.0
8.5 5.3 1.5
7.3 4.3 2.0
6 3.3 2.5

3-14 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

GE
Grid Solutions

R650 Recloser Controller

Chapter 4: Interfaces, Settings & Actual Values

INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1 EnerVista 650 Setup software

4.1.1 Introduction
The EnerVista 650 Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two direct interfaces with a 650
device. The alternate interface is implemented via the device faceplate keypad and display (see the Human Machine
Interface (HMI) section in this chapter).
The EnerVista 650 Setup software interface provides access to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the
operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while
disconnected (offline) or connected (online) with a 650 device. In offline mode, settings files can be created for eventual
download to the device. In online mode, real-time communication with the device is supported.
The EnerVista 650 Setup software, provided with every R650 relay, can be run from a computer supporting Microsoft
Windows XP(SP 2 or 3), Windows 7 or Windows 8. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista 650 Setup
software interface features. The EnerVista 650 Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista
650 Setup software interface.
The EnerVista 650 Setup software package uses ModBus protocol, and is designed to communicate with a single relay at a
time. GE offers different communication software packages, such as GE-POWER, which can be used to communicate
simultaneously with several relays.
EnerVista 650 Setup software provides an easy way to configure, monitor and manage all R650 features.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-1

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.1.1 Using settings files

The EnerVista 650 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
1. In offline mode (relay disconnected), create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
2. In online mode (relay connected), modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then save the settings to
the relay.
3. Combining online and offline modes, create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is
connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of assigned file names. A settings file contains data pertaining to the following
types of relay settings:
• Product Setup
• System Setup
• Protection Elements
• Control Elements
• Inputs/Outputs
• Quick Settings
• Relay Configuration
• Logic Configuration

4.1.1.2 Viewing actual values

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measurements while connected to a relay.

4.1.1.3 Viewing triggered events

In online mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified parameters, via one of the following:
• Event Recorder: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1023 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest.
• Oscillography: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power
system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.

4.1.1.4 Firmware upgrades

The firmware of a R650 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista 650 Setup software. Instructions are
provided in Chapter 9: Bootcode and firmware upgrade.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values,
minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware.
The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.

4.1.1.5 One line diagrams

You can configure a one line diagram (bay mimic) to be used in relays with a graphical display.

4-2 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.2 Main screen

The EnerVista 650 Setup software main window includes the following components:
• Title bar
• Main menu bar
• Main icon bar
• Working area
• Status bar

Title

Working Area

Figure 4-1: EnerVista 650 Setup main screen

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-3

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.3 Connect to the relay

To start communicating with the relay go to Communication > Computer in the main EnerVista 650 Setup menu.

Safety instructions must be followed before connecting the computer to the relay. Safety
NOTICE instructions are detailed in section 1.1.3 Safety instructions. Connect the relay ground terminal and
the communicating computer to a good grounding. Otherwise, communication may not be viable, or
even, in worst cases, the relay and/or the computer can result damaged by overvoltages.
When working online, ensure that all relay communication parameters, such as baud rate, slave ModBus address, etc.,
match the computer settings before connected to the relay.

Figure 4-2: Communication parameters menu

The Communication > Computer screen is divided in several subsections:
• Computer settings: Main communication parameters for serial communication and control type selection.
• Modbus/TCP Setup (if ModBus /TCP is selected as control type): Communication parameters for ModBus TCP
communication.
• Communication control: Device communication status (communicating or not communicating).
• Communication optimization: allows optimizing the communication time outs and failure establishing.

4-4 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.3.1 Computer Settings:

This section shows the communication parameters needed to establish communication with the unit, such as slave
address, communication port, baud rate, parity, control type and startup mode.
Baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits and ModBus slave address for Com2 (RS232 front port and second serial port in the
rear communication board) are displayed in the default text on the relay main screen.
ModBus Slave Address: ModBus address used for serial and Ethernet communication; default 254.
Communication ports: Ports used in the computer for serial communication.
Baud Rate: Baud rate for serial communication (from 1200 to 115200 baud in EnerVista 650 Setup, from 300 to 115200
baud in relay).
Parity: Parity for serial communication. None, odd or even can be selected.
Control Type: The available control modes are:
• No Control Type, this option selects the serial communication mode, for use with serial communication ports (front
port, RS485, or plastic or glass fiber optic).
• MODBUS/TCP, this option selects ModBus TCP/IP communication mode, for communication through the Ethernet port.
In this case, the top right window shows the typical parameters to be programmed; IP address, port address and unit
identifier in the MODBUS TCP SETUP section.
• MODEM, this option displays the parameter to set in case of using a modem for the communication, such as Phone
number, Time out (sec.), init. command, type of dialing (tones or pulses).

4.1.3.2 Communication Control:

Located at the bottom of the screen, this section shows the status of communication with the relay. When the relay is not
communicating, the message "650 Setup is not talking to an 650" is shown and the ON button is enabled. Click ON to start
the EnerVista 650 Setup software communicating with the relay.
When the relay is communicating, the message "650 Setup is now talking to an 650" is shown and OFF is enabled. Click
OFF to disconnect communications between the relay and PC.

4.1.3.3 Communication Optimization:

Adjusting the parameters in the Communication optimization section can improve communication, although using the
default values is recommended in most cases. These parameters are the maximum time to wait for a response in the relay
(in ms) and the maximum number of connection attempts to perform before assuming communications failure.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-5

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.4 File management menu

File management with EnerVista 650 Setup software:

4.1.4.1 Offline mode

Run EnerVista 650 Setup

Open a *.650 file

(“File>Open” menu)

Modify Settings and relay

configuration

YES
Is it necessary to
program
additional logic?

Launch the Logic Configuration tool in EnerVista

650 Setup (“Setpoint>Logic Configuration”)

Create new or modify the existing logic:

(“File>Open Project”)
NO NO

Compile and save logic file (*.pep) and drawing

design (*.aut) in Logic Configuration tool

Exit PLC Graphic Editor and save the *.650 file

from the main application menu

Is the relay
completely
configured?

YES

Save *.650 settings & configuration file

Store in the computer the Logic configuration files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) as
well as the *.650 for further logic changes.

Figure 4-3: Offline mode file management1

1. “Relay and logic configuration” and “Protection and Control Settings” must be uploaded to the R650 relay or the device
to operate properly

4-6 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Table 4-1: Types of files generated by EnerVista 650 Setup software, offline:
Logic Configuration Files (*.pep, *aut, *.lib)
Settings & Configuration File *.650
*.pep *.aut *.lib
Description Settings and Configuration Section Header for Logic Graphical edition User programmable
project container. Logic logic objects
equations (Virtual
Outputs) in FDB
format.
Created by EnerVista 650 Setup Logic configuration Logic configuration Logic configuration
graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLC
Editor) Editor) Editor)
Contents Relay configuration file containing all elements PLC project file PLC Project file Library file to be
Settings, input/output and LEDs configuration, graphic containing the containing all the included as an
display configuration, etc. necessary drawings used by object in a PLC
Equations corresponding to the logic created and information the logic, required project. Logic
compiled in the PLC Editor relative to the relay by 650 relay based packages that can
model, logic on IEC 61131-3 be stored into
libraries included in standard. Functional libraries and be
the project (*.lib), block diagram (FDB). distributed in
graphic file name different PLC
(*.aut), etc. projects.
How to save EnerVista 650 Setup: PLC Editor: PLC Editor: PLC Editor:
File > Save * File > Save Project File > Save Project File > Save Library
How to open EnerVista 650 Setup: PLC Editor: PLC Editor: PLC Editor:
File>Open * File > Open Project File > Open Project File > Library > New
Library
How to Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer) Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer)
transfer to Open the created file (File > Open *) Launch Logic equations Editor (Setpoint > Logic
relay Send to relay from the menu: File > Send info to relay Configuration)
Note that texts used in the configuration of inputs, Open the created PLC project (File > Open Project)
outputs, etc. are not sent to the relay. The only texts Compile the project (Run > Compile)
sent to relay are operations, events, and LEDs. Now the logic (virtual outputs) can be sent directly to relay
(Run > Send Equations to Relay). Texts of virtual outputs are
not stored in the relay, only in the logic configuration files to
be edited.

When using element libraries (both pre-existing in File Library > Open Library or created by the user in File Library > New
Library), the program creates and manages the corresponding files (*.lib) in a folder named FDB (Functional Block
Diagram). These files are used for PLC project compilation. The element library files must be stored with the other logic
configuration files that build the PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib).
Besides sending configuration information to the relay (Settings & configuration in *.650 format), storing the complete set
of *.650, *.pep, *.aut and *.lib files inside the relay is recommended (Communication > Upload info files to relay). This
ensures that logic configuration files are available in future for logic modifications. Even if these files are not used by the
relay, they are required to connect to the relay and analyze its configuration. The EnerVista 650 Setup software program
manages the logic configuration files globally, so that when the *.pep file is uploaded to the relay, the associated *.aut and
*.lib files are also stored.

File storage inside the relay Communication > Upload info files to relay through Ethernet
(RECOMMENDED)
Retrieval of files stored in the relay Communication > Download info files from relay through Ethernet
(RECOMMENDED)

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-7

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.4.2 Online mode

Run EnerVista 650 Setup

Connect to the relay

(“Communication>Computer>ON”)
NO
Modify and send to the
relay protection Settings
and relay configuration

YES
Is it necessary to
program
additional logic?

Launch the Logic Configuration tool in EnerVista

650 Setup (“Setpoint>Logic Configuration”)

Create new or modify the existing logic

(“File>Open Project”)

NO Compile (“Run>Compile”)
and save logic file (*.pep) and drawing design
(*.aut) in Logic Configuration tool (“File>Save
Project”)

Send logic to relay (“Run>Send Equations to

Relay”) and Exit PLC Graphic Editor

Is the relay
completely
configured?

YES

Save all settings & configuration (“File>Get info from relay”)

Store in the relay the Logic configuration files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) as well as the
*.650 for further logic changes. (“Communication>Upload info files to relay”)

Figure 4-4: Online mode file management

4-8 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Table 4-2: Types of files generated by EnerVista 650 Setup software, online
Logic Configuration Files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib)
Settings & Configuration File *.650
*.pep *.aut *.lib
Description Settings and Configuration Section Header for Logic Graphical edition User programmable
project container. Logic logic objects
equations (Virtual
Outputs) in FDB
format.
Created by EnerVista 650 Setup Logic configuration Logic configurationLogic configuration
graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLCgraphic editor (PLC
Editor) Editor) Editor)
Contents Relay configuration file containing all elements, PLC project file PLC Project file Library file to be
settings, input/output and LEDs configuration, graphic containing the containing all the included as an object
display configuration, etc. necessary drawings used by in a PLC project.
Equations corresponding to the logic created and information the logic, requiredLogic packages that
compiled in the PLC Editor relative to the relay by 650 relay based can be stored into
model, logic on IEC 61131-3 libraries and be
libraries included in standard. distributed in
the project (*.lib), Functional block different PLC
graphic file name diagram (FDB). projects.
(*.aut), etc.
How to Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer) Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer)
transfer to Send settings and configuration from file Launch 650 Logic equations editor (Setpoint > Logic
relay Configuration)
Open the created PLC project (File > Open Project)
Compile the project (Run > Compile)
Now the logic (virtual outputs) can be sent directly to relay
(Run > Send Equations to Relay). Texts of virtual outputs are
not stored in the relay, only in the logic configuration files to be
edited.

Modify settings and configuration directly in the relay:

How to save EnerVista 650 Setup: PLC Editor:

File > Get info from relay. User definable texts retrieved File > Save Project File > Save Library
are operations, events, and LEDs.
The relay does not The relay does not The relay does not
provide this provide this provide this
information unless information unless information unless
the *.pep file is the *.pep file is the *.pep file is
stored in the relay stored in the relay. stored in the relay.
To store the logic configuration files in the relay use the
Communication > Upload info files to relay option
How to store Communication > Upload info files to relay through Communication > Upload info files to relay through Ethernet
in the relay Ethernet
How to Communication > Download info files from relay Communication > Download info files from relay through
retrieve from through Ethernet Ethernet
the relay

REMINDER:

Logic programming support files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) CANNOT be retrieved directly from the relay.

It is necessary to do one of the following to store support files:

* Store in the PC
* Upload to the relay (Communication > Upload info files to relay), after which they can be retrieved from the relay

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-9

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.5 EnerVista 650 Setup menu

The EnerVista 650 Setup menu structure is shown in Table 4-3: EnerVista 650 Setup menu structure. This menu structure
applies when communicating with a relay or when offline with a .650 file open.
Unless specified, options are available in both online and offline mode.
(*) indicates options enabled only in online mode. (**) indicates options enabled only in offline mode.

The View > Language submenu controls the default language for the EnerVista 650 Setup program.
NOTICE This feature is only enabled when the relay is not communicating and no file has been opened.
Table 4-3: EnerVista 650 Setup menu structure
IEC 61850
File Setpoint Actual Operations(*) Communication Security View Help
CONFIGURATOR
New (**) Product Front Fixed Computer Login user Traces Instruction
Setup Panel commands Manual
Open (**) System Status Modem (*) Change ModBus GE Multilin
Setup Password Memory on the web
Map
Save (**) Protection Metering Troubleshooti User Languages About
Elements ng (*) Manageme (**) EnerVista
nt 650 Setup
Save As (**) Control Inputs/ Calibration (*)
Elements Outputs
Close (**) Inputs/ Records Upgrade
Outputs (*) Relay (*)
Quick
Settings
Config File Quick Autoreclo
(* 650) Reclose / ser /
Converter Autoreclose Recloser
Configuratio
n
Compare to Relay
settings file Configuratio
n
Properties (**) Upgrade 650
Web Server
Logic
Configuratio
n
Get info from IEC103
relay (*) Configuratio
n
Send info to Clock (*) Upload info
relay (*) files to relay
Print Setup (**) Download
info files from
relay
Print Preview (**)
Print (**)
Print to file
PLC Checksum
Calculation
Settings
Checksum
Calculation
Order Code
Exit

4-10 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.6 File menu

File
New (**) Create a new settings and configuration file, with the default relay
settings and no configuration
Open (**) Open a settings and configuration file for offline working.
Save (**) Save *.650 settings and configuration file
Save As (**) Save as *.650 settings and configuration file.
Close (**) Close the opened *.650 file in EnerVista 650 Setup.
Config File (*.650) Converter Tool to convert the *.650 files from one version to another
Compare to settings file Compare online unit or opened settings file to another settings file
Properties (**) File properties for *.650.
Get info from relay (*) Retrieve the *.650 settings and relay configuration compiled equations
from the relay.
Send info to relay (*) Send and write the *.650 settings and configuration to the relay.
Print Setup (**) To configure printer settings.
Print Preview (**) Preview of settings and configuration file printing format.
Print (**) Launch the *.650 file to be printed.
Print to file (*.xls) (**) *.650 printed to file in excel format.
PLC Checksum Calculation Calculate the CRC of PLC equations of the .650 file (When a .650 is
uploaded to the relay, the calculate PLC CRC and the actual value of the
PLC CRC read from the relay must match).
Settings Checksum Calculate the CRC of settings of the .650 file (When a .650 is uploaded to
Calculation the relay, the calculate Setting CRC and the actual value of the Setting
CRC read from the relay must match).
Order code(*) This allows a model to have special functionality (see model selection)
with password requirements. For detailed information see chapter 9.
Exit Quit the application closing all the open windows.

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-11

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.6.1 New, Open, Save, Save as, and Close

In these options, the EnerVista 650 Setup program opens a dialog box (with default path to Files > Config program folder)
where the setting and configuration files can be selected from offline files. To access this menu, there must be no
communication between the PC program and the relay (offline mode).

Figure 4-5: Open file menu

Once the *.650 file for the appropriate relay model (FXGX) is selected, the EnerVista 650 Setup program enables the offline
options to fully program the unit. The enabled menus in the EnerVista 650 Setup program are: File, Setpoint, Actual,
Communication, View and Help.
Offline mode displays the File, Setpoint, Actual, Communication, Security, View and Help submenus in order to program the
unit. The Actual values submenus are for structure purposes only. Values are not refreshed while the relay is not
communicating.
The Save as and Close file options are used to save the *.650 file into the computer and to close the current file. To work in
offline mode for settings and configuration editing, a new *.650 file can be opened without closing the previous file. The
Close option is instead used to clear all data in EnerVista 650 Setup program, enabling the Language, Upgrade firmware
version and Upgrade Operating system menu options.

4-12 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.6.2 Configuration file converter

The configuration file converter tool provides automatic conversion of configuration files from and older firmware version
to a newer version. In order to convert a configuration file, follow these steps:
1. Working in offline mode, go to File > Config File (*.650) Converter
2. Select the file to be converted.
3. After source file selection is complete, select conversion settings. Make the following selections:
Source Model: Indicates source R650 model and original version of selected file.
Destination model: Drop-down list of available R650 models and firmware versions. Select a
destination model and firmware version. In the bottom part of this section, a
brief description of all models affected is displayed in green after selecting one
model in the list.
Source file path Indicates the path where source model file is located.

Source Model

Destination Model

Source file path

Figure 4-6: Config file (*650) converter menu

It is possible to change the model type (FXGX) using the conversion tool. It must be taken into account that part of the logic
can be readjusted to fit the new input and output board selection. Notice also that the external wiring of inputs and
outputs boards is different for type 1, 2, 4,5, and 6.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-13

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.6.3 Properties
When this option is selected, the program displays the relay model information, firmware version, etc. of the file being
edited, as shown:

Figure 4-7: File properties menu

4.1.6.4 Print options

The printing options are active only in offline mode with a file open, and not in online mode, connected with the relay.

Print setup
Option to configure the printer options and settings.

Print preview
Option to preview the whole settings and configuration file (*.650) in paper format to be printed as shown:

Figure 4-8: Print preview of settings file

4-14 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Print
Option to print the relay configuration using the PC default (active) printer on port COMx or LPT. This option is active only in
offline mode and in file edition (not in online mode while connected to the relay).

Print to file (*xls)

Option to export the configuration file to an Excel file.

4.1.6.5 Compare to settings file

This tool provides an automatic comparison of two different configuration files, or of an online unit to one settings file.
Open the source *.650 file and select the version and model to compare against. The results of the comparison are
displayed as shown:

Figure 4-9: Compare to settings file

4.1.6.6 PLC checksum calculation

When working in offline mode, the PLC Checksum calculation option calculates the CRC of the PLC equations and Relay
configuration section for the open *.650 file. When a *.650 file is uploaded to the relay, the calculated PLC Checksum and
the actual value of the PLC Checksum read from the relay (Actual values > Status > System Info) must match.
In order to calculate this checksum, the following sections of the * .650 file are considered:
• All equations compiled in the file and located in EnerVista 650 Setup Setpoint > Logic configuration
• Configuration available in the file and located in EnerVista 650 Setup Setpoint > Relay configuration, excluding:
– HMI tab configuration
– All configured text
– Opening and closing time in the Switchgear section

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-15

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.6.7 Setting checksum calculation

When working in offline mode, the Settings Checksum calculation option calculates the CRC of different configured
settings for the open *.650 file. When a *.650 file is uploaded to the relay, the calculated Settings Checksum and the actual
value of the Settings Checksum read from the relay (Actual values > Status > System Info) must match.
In order to calculate this checksum, the following sections of the * .650 file are considered:
• All settings in the relay configuration section (Setpoint > Relay configuration) excluding:
– Those communication settings: Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication settings > SerialPorts or
Network (Ethernet) or Modbus Protocol or Routing
– Relay calibration factors
– Opening and closing time in the Switchgear section

4.1.7 Setpoint menu

Setpoint
Product Setup Communications settings for all protocols and physical mediums. ModBus user map
definition, fault report, oscillography, data logger demand settings and time settings.
System Setup General settings, source and load voltage sensing settings, current sensing settings, Flex
curve definitions, recloser, switchgear, and miscellaneous settings.
Protection Elements Phase, neutral, ground, sensitive ground and negative sequence current settings. Voltage
element settings and power settings management.
Control Elements Setting groups, under- and over-frequency settings, synchrocheck, autoreclose, breaker
failure, VT fuse failure, broken conductor, pulse counters, analog comparators, digital
counters, cold load pickup and PLC timer masks
Inputs/Outputs Contact I/O settings for all boards available in device, remote comms, force outputs and
virtual inputs.
Quick Settings Menu including key configuration settings such as; Current and Voltage sensing or current
protection element.
Quick Reclose / Menu including key configuration settings for the recloser device and the autoreclose
Autoreclose element.
Configuration
Relay Configuration Configuration of Outputs, LEDs, Operations, Protection Elements, Oscillography, Control
Events, Control Elements, Switchgear, Inputs, Virtual Inputs, Operations and HMI. Whole
relay configuration with internal relay signals or user-definable ones as logic (virtual
outputs).
Logic Configuration Logic configuration graphic editor (PLC Editor). It is a PLC Project file editor that contains all
the internal drawings used to make the logic (virtual outputs) based on IEC 61131-3
standard. Functional block diagram (FDB).
IEC103 Configuration IEC103 settings for available IEC103 models (3) when communicating through Ethernet
with Enervista 650 Setup
Clock (*) Relay synchronization to computer clock or to user-definable date and time. Online mode
only.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4-16 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.7.1 Product setup menu

Product Setup
Communication Serial Ports, Network (Ethernet), ModBus Protocol, DNP Slave, IEC 870-5-104, SNTP settings,
Settings PTP1588 and Routing.
ModBus User Map ModBus user map definition. The ModBus user map is formed by 256 records, selectable
from the complete relay ModBus map.
Fault Report Fault report settings. Possibility to show fault reports on HMI screen.
Oscillography Oscillography settings (trigger position, samples per cycle, etc.). The trigger and digital
channels (up to 16) must be configured in Setpoint > Relay configuration.
Data Logger Data logger configuration
Demand Demand settings. The demand trigger and demand reset signals must be configured in
Setpoint > Relay configuration
Time Settings Time synchronization settings and daylight savings time settings.
Conf Events Configurable event settings. Up to 24 configurable event measurements are available.

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.7.2 System setup menu

System Setup
General Settings This screen describes and enables the settings of the power system where the relay
operates. Some of these settings are used only for metering values presentation purposes;
however, some of them apply directly to the sampling and analog-digital conversion
process (rated frequency setting). Therefore, these settings need to be adjusted to fit the
system settings.
Source Volt. Sensing Setup for the capacitive voltage dividers connected to the relay voltage terminals. Settings
for calibration factors are also provided.
Load Volt. Sensing Setup for the capacitive voltage dividers connected to the relay voltage terminals. Settings
for calibration factors are also provided.
Current Sensing Setup menu for the Current Transformers (CTs) connected to the R650 terminals. The setup
of the three-phase CTs, the Ground CT, and the Sensitive Ground CT require a selection of
primary CT ratings. The secondary CT ratings are selected between 1A or 5A for phases
and ground, and fixed at 0.2A for Sensitive Ground Input.
Flex Curves The relay incorporates 4 user curves called Flex Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these
curves are defined by the user in Setpoint > System Setup > Flex Curves > Edit Curve
menu in EnerVista 650 Setup. User defined flex curves can be selected as an operation
curve in all the time overcurrent functions in the relay.
Recloser Configuration of recloser maintenance parameters. Setpoints to select the trip mode
between One Pole or Three Pole are also provided.
Switchgear Configuration of snapshot events for each switchgear (enable or disable)
Miscellaneous Settings Settings related to the relay working mode. Out of service setting, and Local/Remote mode
are also included.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-17

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.7.3 Protection elements menu

This option shows all protection elements available in the relay as shown in the following table. There are six setting
groups of protection elements. Protection element groups are within each setting group.

Table 4-4: Protection elements menu

Protection
Elements
Setting Group 1 All protection functions available when setting group 1 is the active group
Setting Group 2 All protection functions available when setting group 2 is the active group
Setting Group 3 All protection functions available when setting group 3 is the active group
Setting Group 4 All protection functions available when setting group 4 is the active group
Setting Group 5 All protection functions available when setting group 5 is the active group
Setting Group 6 All protection functions available when setting group 6 is the active group

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

Table 4-5: Protection elements in each setting group

Phase Current
Phase TOC High Phase time overcurrent, high level (51PH)
Phase TOC Low Phase time overcurrent, low level (51PL)
Phase IOC High Phase instantaneous overcurrent, high level (50PH)
Phase IOC Low Phase instantaneous overcurrent, low level (50PL)
Phase Directional Phase directional unit (67P). Quadrature Voltage for polarization
Thermal Model Thermal model or Thermal image unit for phases (49)
Neutral Current
Neutral TOC Neutral time overcurrent (51N)
Neutral IOC Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (50N)
Neutral Directional Neutral directional unit (67N). Voltage, current and dual polarization.
Ground Current
Ground TOC Ground time overcurrent (51G)
Ground IOC Ground instantaneous overcurrent (50G)
Ground Directional Ground directional unit (67G). Voltage, current and dual polarization.
Sensitive Ground
Current
Sensitive Ground TOC Sensitive ground time overcurrent (51SG).
Sensitive Ground IOC Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent (50SG).
Isolated Ground IOC Isolated ground overcurrent (50IG)
Sensitive Ground Sensitive ground directional unit (67SG)
Directional
Negative
Sequence
Current
Negative Sequence Negative sequence time overcurrent (46P)
TOC
Source Voltages
Phase UV Phase undervoltage (27P)
Phase OV Phase overvoltage (59P)

4-18 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Neutral OV Neutral overvoltage (59N)

Negative Sequence OV Negative sequence overvoltage (47)
Load Voltages
Phase UV Phase undervoltage (27P)
Phase OV Phase overvoltage (59P)
Neutral OV Neutral overvoltage (59N)
Negative Sequence OV Negative sequence overvoltage (47)
Power
Forward Power Forward power (32FP), in primary values.
Directional Power Directional power (32), in primary values.
Watt Gnd Flt Wattmetric ground fault (32N), in secondary values
Frequency
Underfrequency Underfrequency unit (81U).
Overfrequency Overfrequency unit (81O).
Miscellaneous
Broken Conductor Broken or fallen conductor detection function (I2/I1). Grouped element.
Ratio between the negative sequence current, I2, and the positive sequence current I1. In
normal and balanced load situations, this ratio is zero, while in severe load fault conditions,
an unbalance is produced and this ratio is increased.

4.1.7.4 Control elements menu

This option shows all protection elements available in the relay as shown in the following table.

Table 4-6: Control elements menu

Control Elements
Setting Group R650 incorporates up to six setting groups. Only one of setting group will be active at a
given time. Units grouped under Protection elements section will be the units affected by
changing of setting group.
Synchrocheck Synchronism check unit (25). Single element.
Autoreclose Recloser (79). Single element.
Breaker Failure Breaker failure (50BF). Single element.
VT Fuse Failure Fuse Failure (VTFF). Single element.
Pulse Counters Pulse counters function. 8 counters provided.
Analog Comparators Analog comparator function. 20 analog comparators provided.
Digital Counters Up to 8 Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup Cold Load Pickup Function. Single element.
PLC Timer Masks Configuration of masks that can be assigned to PLC timers
60 CTS Failure Current transformer failure function
2nd HRMC Inhibit Second harmonic inhibit element to block any other protection element in the presence of
second harmonic in the signal.
Coil Circuit Supervision Coil circuit supervision

4.1.7.5 Inputs/Outputs menu

Section that contains the settings for all input and output boards and the Force Outputs and Virtual inputs activation tools.
Inputs/Outputs

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-19

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Contact I/O Inputs and outputs settings for all boards in R650. The I/O settings configuration can only
be performed through EnerVista 650 Setup, not available through the HMI.
Force Outputs (*) This menu allows activating each contact output in the relay, to facilitate maintenance
testing. Online mode only.
Virtual Inputs (*) This menu allows operating virtual inputs. These variables are used as inputs to logic
schemes configured in the relay. Virtual inputs can be operated in a latched mode (32
latched virtual inputs) or in Self-reset mode (32 self reset virtual inputs).
Remote Comms. This menu allows configuring remote inputs coming from other devices and allow
enabling None, GSSE or GOOSE messages. Available for IEC61850 (7) models only.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.7.6 Quick settings menu

This menu allows quick access to the main Setpoints of the relay.

Figure 4-10: Quick Settings

4-20 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.7.7 Quick Reclose / Autoreclose settings menu

This menu gives access to main settings related with the Recloser and the Autoreclose element.

Figure 4-11: Quick Recloser / Autoreclose Settings

4.1.7.8 Relay configuration menu

This is the relay configuration section in which the relay can be configured using internal states or already compiled
equation on PLC Editor
.
Relay
Configuration
Outputs Configuration of contact output operate and reset signals for all boards.
LEDs 15 LEDs fully configurable from any logical variable, contact or virtual input. First 5 LEDs
are latched by hardware, the rest are self-reset but can be latched through PLC
configuration. All 15 LEDs can be latched by setting. The vertical LED label for the relay can
be printed from this menu.
Operations Configurable operations, up to 32. Operation texts, interlocks, final states, frontal keys,
time outs and masters.
Protection Elements This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different protection
elements. To block, reset, initiate the different protection elements inputs.
Control Elements This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different control elements.
AR Control Elements Configuration of the inputs of the Autoreclose element.
Oscillography Trigger and up to 16 digital channels to be included in oscillography records, are
programmable from any logical variable, contact or virtual input. Text configuration is only
for offline mode.
NOTE: This screen is used for the configuration of digital channels and oscillography
trigger. The rest of parameters, such as function enabling/disabling, sampling rate,
number of oscillography files, etc. must be set on the Setpoint > Product Setup >
Oscillography menu.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-21

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Control Events Up to 128 user programmable events from any logical variable, contact or virtual input.
Possibility to display the event as an alarm on the alarms panel. Control events are also
displayed in the snapshot events recording. 1 ms time tagging.
A control event is a logic signal associated with an operand or combination of operands,
that allows following the status of that signal.
Switchgear Up to 12 configurable switchgear elements. A switchgear element can be a breaker, a line
selector switch, a grounding selector switch, a busbar selector switch, etc. This screen
allows configuration of type of contacts, opening and closing time, contact assignation
and text for events related to switchgear. There are 64 pre-established events for
switchgear, which correspond to opening, closing, Error01 and Error11 of the 12
programmable switchgear elements.
Recloser Configuration of the type of contacts, opening and closing time, contact assignation and
text for events related to the recloser.
Remote outputs Up to 32 DNA bits and 64 user St bits to be transmitted to remote devices over CAN using
GSSE messages.
Inputs Text configuration for offline mode file management for all the contact inputs available in
device.
Virtual Inputs Text configuration for offline mode file management. 32 latched and 32 self reset virtual
inputs.
MMI (HMI-Human Screen one line diagram configuration. This menu shows a canvas to draw a simplified
Machine Interface) one-line diagram of a bay in a feeder, line, transformer, etc. The menu includes a library for
power elements, metering elements, text and drawings. See an example on the next page.
The following figures show an example of the default factory configuration for R650:

Figure 4-12: Relay configuration

4-22 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Figure 4-13: HMI configuration

4.1.7.9 Logic Configuration menu

This logic configuration allows creating more complex configurations, using the graphical PLC, than using the tables from
Relay Configuration. For file management detailed information go to section 4.1.4 File management menu.
File description:
*.pep:Header for Logic project: PLC project file containing the necessary information relative to the relay model, logic
libraries included in the project (*.lib), graphic file name (*.aut), etc.
*.aut:PLC Project file containing all the drawings used by the logic, required by 650 relay based on IEC 61131-3 standard.
Functional block diagram (FDB).
*.lib:User programmable logic objects: Library file to be included as an object in a PLC project. Logic packages that can be
stored into libraries and be distributed in different PLC projects.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-23

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.7.10 IEC 103 Configuration menu

This menu allows to update the IEC 103 configuration of the unit.

Figure 4-14: IEC 103 Configurator

See chapter 5.13

4.1.7.11 Clock menu

This menu allows updates to the date and time of the relay, either synchronizing them with the PC clock, or entering the
information manually.

Figure 4-15: Clock

4-24 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.8 Actual values menu

The menu bar in the main screen of EnerVista 650 Setup software shows the ACTUAL menu option. This option
concentrates and displays all the status of protection, control elements, metering, counters information, oscillography,
events, fault locator, etc. This section shows only the structure of menus in EnerVista 650 Setup.

Actual
Front Panel The relay front LED status is shown on this menu.
Status Protection and control status signals for all available protection functions in device.
Metering All metering values available in device. Primary and secondary values, frequency and
phasor diagram provided.
Inputs/Outputs All input and output status provided. For contact inputs and contact outputs as well as
virtual input and virtual output signals.
Records Only enabled in online mode, retrieval of all the available records in device. Snapshot
events, control events, oscillography and fault reports.
Reclose / Autorecloser Main information about the status of the recloser and the Autoreclose element.

4.1.8.1 Front panel

The front panel menu shows the LEDs submenu where all the front LEDs can be monitored.

4.1.8.2 Status
The following menu includes all the available protection status in the device. Location of different menus can vary
depending firmware version.

Status
Operation Bits Up to 32 elements. OPERATION BIT XX is (0) when the configured time out for the operation
XX expires or when success conditions are met. And it is (1) if operation XX is executed and
interlocks are fulfilled.
Recloser Recloser status (open, closed or undefined). Maintenance data is also shown here.
Protection Status of all the protection units in the device.
Control Elements Status of all the control units available in the device.
Protection Summary This screen shows a complete list of all protection and control elements in the relay,
showing their status (enabled or not).
Snapshots Events Summary of the snapshot events status (enabled or disabled) for protection, control, inputs
summary and outputs boards and switchgear.
ModBus User Map Up to 256 elements. Value in SIGNED INT 16 BIT format of the reading for the selected
address configured in Setpoint > Product Setup > ModBus User Map
Switchgear Status Up to 12 blocks of switchgear status signals for the 12 configurable devices. Status signals
such as inputs for A and B contacts, status for A and B, open and close status, error 00 and
error 11, open init and close init, fail to open and fail to close signals.
Calibration Internal states for calibration. Factory calibration and calibration error signals.
FlexCurves Flex curve status for A, B, C and D user curves. (0) if it is not configured, (1) if it is configured.
To configure a flex curve go to Setpoint > System Setup > Flex Curves menu.
System Info This screen can monitor the system parameters and the internal status of the Relay
operating system. Not enabled by default, password required
Records Status Information related to the different records stored in the Relay, such as: Fault reports,
control events, oscillography, data logger, demand, energy, and recloser opening and
closing operations.
SNTP-IRIG_B & PTP Information related to synchronization via IRIG_B, SNTP or PTP1588.
1588
Versions Information related to the different firmware versions and hardware revisions.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-25

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Redundancy Information related to the status of the frames sent through PRP and HSR. Also information
related to the status of RSTP port.

4.1.8.3 Metering
The Metering menu includes all the measurements available in the device. Primary and secondary values, and also the
data related to the recording functions in the relay

Metering
Primary Values Primary values measurements for currents, voltages, power, energy and demand
Per Unit Values Secondary values measurements for currents, voltages.
Phasor Diagram Current, voltage and sequence components.
Frequency Load and source frequencies.
Power quality Harmonics and THD for current, source and load voltages.

4.1.8.4 Inputs/Outputs menu

The Inputs/Outputs menu includes all the inputs and outputs signals available in the device. Contact and virtual type.

inputs/outputs
Contact Inputs Status of digital inputs in the Relay for each board according to the relay model.
Contact Output Status Status of digital outputs in the Relay for each board according to the relay model.
Contact Outputs Status (activated or not) of the variables used to operate a contact output. To configure
Operates these signals go to Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs menu.
Contact Outputs Status (activated or not) of the variables used to reset a contact output. To configure these
Resets signals go to Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs menu. This output reset
Command is only effective if latch is selected for Output Type setting on the I/O board,
thus the contact output has been configured to emulate function 86 (latching relay).
IO Board Status Status of I/O boards. This status provides if the hardware it is OK (boards matching relay
model, correctly inserted in their tracks, in good state and communicating through the
internal CAN bus).
Virtual Inputs Status of Virtual inputs latched (32) and self-reset (32).
Virtual Outputs Status of virtual outputs (configured in PLC Editor). Up to 512.
Remote Outputs States of remote outputs for IEC61850 models.
Remote Inputs Status of remote device and remote inputs for IEC61850 models.
Analog Inputs (*) Measurements coming from analog inputs (DCMA)
Virtual Output Latched Status of Virtual Output Latched (configured in PLC Editor). Up to 16.
Virtual Output Status of Virtual Output Analogues configured in PLC Editor). Up to 49 float values and 49
Analogues integer values can be used.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4-26 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.8.5 Records menu

The Records menu is only available in online mode and includes the possibility to retrieve all the records available in the
device. By serial or Ethernet.

Records (*)
Event recorder (*) Retrieval and visualization of snapshot event (all and new), control events and alarm panel.
By serial or Ethernet (ModBus RTU or TCP/IP)
Waveform capture (*) Retrieval of oscillography files, by Ethernet.
Fault Report (*) Retrieval and visualization of fault report files, by Ethernet.
Data logger (*) Retrieval and visualization of data logger files. Only by Ethernet.

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-27

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.9 Operations menu

Option only available in online mode, showing all the operations previously configured in the relay with their
corresponding texts, which must be different from the default text (Op_X not configured).

operations
Operation 1 (*) Entry to first operation (with its corresponding text)
... ...
Operation 32 (*) Entry to 32nd operation (with its corresponding text)

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.10 Communications menu

The communication menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update
procedures available in device: firmware, operating system, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and
download info files to/from relay).
For more detail information go to section 4.1.3 Connect to the relay for communication menus description and to section 5
for flash memory update procedures.

Communication
Computer Menu to start communication with the relay.
Modem (**) Configure the unit for remote communications via modem, using a telephone line. This is
only available if the relay is not communicating and if modem has been selected under
Communication > Computer control type.
Troubleshooting (*) Read/write to ModBus addresses, for verifying communications and access to different
positions in the ModBus memory map. Only available if the communication has already
been established.
Calibration (*) Retrieve the unit calibration settings and storing them in a file (with extension *.cal). For
reading or storing the calibration settings in the relay go to Communications >
Calibration > Get or Set calibration settings and select the intended calibration file. The
calibration retrieval process must be performed before updating the operating system.
When the firmware and bootcode are updated, all the data in the relay is deleted,
including the factory calibration settings. When only the firmware is updated (for versions
higher than 1.50), the calibration settings are automatically saved in the relay.
Upgrade relay (**) Upgrade firmware version (Ethernet connection): Update the relay firmware through
Ethernet communication . Firmware is related to the relay internal program, designed by
GE Multilin, which performs the protection and control functions, and which is run by the
relay main microprocessor.
Upgrade 650 web Upgrade 650 web server (Ethernet connection):Go to Communications > Upgrade 650 web
server server. The relay web server application can be updated to further versions (if available)
using this menu without modifying the relay operating system.
Upload info files to Upload info files to relay (Ethernet connection): This functionality is used to store setting
relay files (*.650) inside the relay, as well as auxiliary files used by the programmable logic
graphical editor (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib).
Download info files Download info files from relay (Ethernet connection): This functionality is used for
from relay retrieving the files (*.650 and *.pep, *.aut, *.lib) that have been previously stored in the
relay flash memory.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

CAREFULLY READ THE FLASH MEMORY UPDATE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED IN SECTION

CAUTION “BOOT CODE AND FIRMWARE" AND CLOSE ALL RUNNING APPLICATIONS BEFORE
PERFORMING FIRMWARE AND OPERATING SYSTEM UPDATES.

4-28 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

*.650 files contain protection, control settings, relay configuration and compiled logic equations. This
NOTICE file can be retrieved from the relay, using the File > Get info from relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup
(through serial or Ethernet communication). File > Send info to relay option stores this *.650 file in
the relay.
*.pep, *.aut and *.lib files contain the logic configuration projects necessary to modify the logic
(virtual outputs) in the relay. These files can be stored in the relay, using the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup (through Ethernet communication). They can
be retrieved using Communication > Download info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup
program (Ethernet communication). Take into account that the *.pep, *.aut and library files are
necessary to modify the PLC logic (virtual outputs). Without these files setting and configuration can
be modified but not logic equations (virtual outputs). It is advisable to use the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option to store these logic configuration files into the relay.
*.pep, *.aut and *.lib files contain the logic configuration projects necessary to modify the logic
(virtual outputs) in the relay. These files can be stored in the relay, using the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup (through Ethernet communication). They can
be retrieved using Communication > Download info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup
program (Ethernet communication). Take into account that the *.pep, *.aut and library files are
necessary to modify the PLC logic (virtual outputs). Without these files setting and configuration can
be modified but not logic equations (virtual outputs). It is advisable to use the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option to store these logic configuration files into the relay.
An example of Communication > Troubleshooting follows:

Figure 4-16: Communication troubleshooting example

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-29

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.11 Security menu

The security menu includes all the menus related to security control in EnerVista 650 Setup. EnerVista 650 Setup security
users and passwords are not related to passwords in HMI. Each security level has its own access for HMI management
and EnerVista 650 Setup management.

Security
Login User (*) Log on menu for EnerVista 650 Setup. Enabled after security control has been enabled in
user management menu.
Change Password (*) Menu to change passwords and establish password recovering questions.
User Management (*) User management dialog box.

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.12 View menu

The view menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update procedures
available in device: firmware, operating system, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and download info
files to/from relay).
The ModBus memory map is detailed in the complete instruction manual (English only) and can be obtained from
EnerVista 650 Setup program.

View
Traces (*) ModBus communication traces between the EnerVista 650 Setup and the relay.
ModBus Memory map Complete ModBus memory map description.
Languages (**) Option to change the EnerVista 650 Setup default language. Only available if the relay is
not communicating and no file (*650) is open.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.13 Help menu

Complete instructions manual and data about EnerVista 650 Setup release.

Help
Instruction Manual Instructions manual in the language selected in View > Languages.
GE Multilin on the Web GE Multilin web page link.
About EnerVista 650 Release version and date of the EnerVista 650 Setup program.
Setup

4-30 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2 Human-machine interface (HMI)

The HMI interface consists of several functional panels. The faceplate can be unscrewed to allow easy access to the
removable modules. There is a removable dust cover that protects the front USB Communications port. The following
figure shows the HMI in R650

DISPLAY and LEDs

Ÿ Graphic 16x20 or text 4x20 LCD display.
Fluorescent backlight to improve visibility
Ÿ Multicolor programmable LEDs with label
panel

KEYPAD
Ÿ Local/Remote/Off pushbutton with LEDs
Ÿ Key control for easy navigation
Ÿ Ergonomic programmable keys

FRONT PORT
Ÿ Electrically insulated front USB
communication port

Figure 4-17: Enhanced HMI interface

4.2.1 Display
R650 units are available with two different options for the front display. The first option is an alphanumerical display of 4
lines with 20 characters each, and the second option is a graphical display of 16 lines with 40 characters each (128x240
pixels).
The boot code and firmware versions can be seen in the relay text main screen, this screen is the default screen in the text
menu for all models: After the text "R650", appears the relay firmware version (8.00 in the example), and between brackets
the boot program version (8.00 in the example), followed by "General Electric", the relay model and the default front port
(COM2) communication parameters.
R650 8.00 (8.00)
General Electric
R650MAKF6G1LOE7LH
19200N81: MODBUS: 254
Figure 4-18: Text main screen

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-31

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.2.2 LED indicators

The relay provides 16 LED indicators, 15 user programmable plus one non-configurable LED (READY) that shows if the relay
is in service.
Programmable LEDs are divided into groups of 5 LEDs, each of the groups having a different color. The first group of LED
indicators is latched by hardware (red), usually configured for trip signals. The second group (yellow) and third group
(green) of LED indicators are self-reset and will reset once the condition has been cleared. These LEDs can also be latched
using logic through PLC configuration. All 15 LEDs are latched through relay settings.
The ESC key is used to reset any latched LED indicator, once the condition has been cleared. Keep the ESC button pressed
for more than 3 seconds; all LEDs light up, verifying their correct operation. When releasing the ESC key, all indicators
programmed with memory, such as tripping LEDs, are reset.There is also a reset LEDs button dedicated for this purpose.
The latched conditions can also be reset via communications using the LED reset input (to configure this signal go to
Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Control Elements > LED RESET INPUT). By default this LED reset input signal is set to
LEDS RESET operation.

4.2.3 Pushbuttons
The front panel provides:
Push buttons: keypad (5 user programmable plus ESC/ESCAPE non configurable), keypad for easy navigation, command
pushbutton to select operations mode.
USB port: intended for connection to a portable PC.

4.2.3.1 Keypad

8sed for closing the user programmable

switchgear. It is fully Srogrammable.

8VHGIRUFORVLQJWKHXVHUSURJUDPPDEOH
VZLWFKJHDU,WLVIXOO\SURJUDPPDEOH

F1. User programmable.

F2. User programmable.

F3 / *. User programmable.

Up Key. Used for selecting menus,

submenus, DQGseWtinJV
Down Key. Used for selecting menus,
submenus, and changLQJ values of settings

Enter Key. Press to enter to submenus

or to change values.

Escape key. Press key to exit from menus

Reset key. 3UHVVWR test all LEDs and reset

the trip LEDs.

Figure 4-19: Enhanced keypad description

4-32 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.3.2 Command push button

The unit incorporates a command pushbutton located at the top left, with three options: local, remote, and off. The first
option (LOCAL) allows executing operations in local mode (HMI, front port, and rear COM2 port). The second option
(REMOTE) allows operation execution only through remote communications (COM1 and ETH_1/ETH2 or ETH_E/ETH_A/
ETH_B (Depending on model)). The third option (OFF) blocks the execution of operations. Each position is identified with an
LED indicator, as follows:

LOCAL operations (green)

REMOTE operations (green)
OFF (red)

Press the command button to switch from local to remote operations mode and vice versa. OFF status (operation inhibited
for maintenance and safety) can be reach pressing the commands pushbutton during several seconds (local-remote-off
sequence).
The local-remote-off sequence can be also available through communications (see chapter 5.8), with a configurable signal
that can be set in the Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Control Elements screen.

4.2.4 Screen contrast

Backlight level regulation can be performed by using the keypad. The Reset button must be pressed at the same time that
the up or down key is pressed to increase or decrease the contrast.

4.2.5 Text menus

4.2.5.1 Navigation
Text menu is available for all models, this is the main menu for visualizing actual values, metering, changing settings, etc.
through the HMI. In models with graphical display besides this text main menu there are several screens providing more
performance for control purposes.
Press the enter key to enter the main menu, starting from the standby screen (default main screen). The default main
screen can be accessed pressing ESC key until it appears. In all the navigation press the enter key to select the desired
header display (top-level menu). Each press of the enter key advances through the main heading pages as illustrated
below. To return to previous menus press the ESC key. To move inside the top-level menu without changing to other low
levels, use up/down keys.
When pressing the up/down keys the selected menu is marked by a single scroll bar character. The mark (>) in the right
part of any menu means that contains more than one level.
Figure 4-20: Text menu navigation Shows an example of main menu navigation:

Symbol Action Performed Navigation in menu

ENTER Press Enter Key Enter next level

ESCAPE Press ESC key Exit to previous level
Up / down keys Move up and down in the
same level
Menu selection Menu selection
> More menus to display More menus to display

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-33

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

R650 8.00 (8.00) ? Actual Values ? Front Panel >

General Electric Enter Snapshot event Enter Status >
R650MAKF6G1LOE7LH Escape Fault report Escape Metering >
19200N81: MODBUS: 254 * View Settings Inputs/Outputs >
Change Settings
Date & Time * Product Setup >
Commands System Setup >
Passwords Protection Elements >
+ Select Main Screen Control Elements >
Select Language
← Return + Logotype >
Metering >
All >
← Return
Figure 4-20: Text menu navigation

4.2.5.2 Text menu hierarchy

The structure of HMI text menu is similar to the EnerVista 650 Setup menu in the actual values and settings (view and
change) menus. The main menu shows the following options:

Name Description Navigation in menu

Actual Values Actual values of all the signals available in device. Press enter key to enter next level. Press ESC to
Status of protection and control elements, return to default main screen.
measurements, inputs and outputs, etc.
Snapshot events Visualization of all snapshot events in text mode (two Press enter key to visualize snapshot events in text
screens for each snapshot event). In graphical displays menu. Press ESC to return to default main screen.
there can be seen in a dedicated screen.
Fault Report Fault reports information available in HMI (two screens Press enter key to enter next level. Move Up/
for each fault report) Downto see all the available fault reports in device.
Press enter key to enter particular information for
fault report selected.
View Settings Visualization of all protection and control settings Press enter key to enter next level. Move Up/Down
available in device. to select submenu. Press ESC to return to previous
level.
Change Settings Menu accessing all protection and control settings Press enter key to enter next level. Move Up/Down
available in device. Inputs and outputs settings, relay to select submenu. Press esc to return to previous
configuration and logic configuration are not available level.
in HMI, only via EnerVista 650 Setup software.
Date & Time Date and time visualization and modification. First mode is visualization. Press enter key again to
start modification in date and time. Press ESC to
return to previous level.
Commands Operations execution in local mode. Move Up/Down to pre select operation. Press enter
key to select and confirm. Press ESC to return to
previous level.
Password Password menu for settings and commands Move Up/Down to select submenu. Press enter key
to enter next level. Press ESC to return to previous
level.
Select Main Screen Selection of default main screen in text menu. Move Up/Down to select the default main screen
type. Press enter key to confirm.
Select Language Language selection. Between default language (see Move Up/Down to select the default language.
order code) and English. Press senter key to confirm selection. Switch the
relay off and on.
< - return Return to previous level Press enter key to return to previous level.

4-34 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.5.3 Actual Values

The Actual Values menu option in HMI concentrates and displays all the status of protection, control elements, metering,
counters information, oscillography, events, fault locator, etc.

Front Panel >

LEDs
Status >
Operation Bits
Recloser Single - Three Pole
Recloser States
Protection > Protection Blocks
Phase Current
Neutral Current
Ground Current
Sens. Ground Current
Neg. Seq. Current
Thermal Model
Source Voltage
Load Voltage
Power
Frequency
Miscellaneous
Control Elements > Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure
Setting Groups
Pulse Counters
Analog Comparators
Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup
60CTS Failure
2nd HRMC Inhibit
Coil Circuit Superv
Switchgear Status > Switchgear 1
Switchgear...
Switchgear 12
FlexCurves
System Info
Records Status > Fault Reports
Control Events
Oscillography
Data logger
Demand
Energy
RCL Last Statistics
RCL Mean Statistics
SNTP-IRIG_B-PTP
Redundancy
Metering >
Primary Values > Current
Source Voltage
Load Voltage
Power
Energy
Demand
Per Unit Values > Current
Source Voltage
Load Voltage
Frequency

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-35

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Power Quality > Current Harmonics

Source Voltage Harmonics
Load Voltage Harmonics
Inputs/Outputs >
Contact Inputs > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output St. > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output Op. > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output Rs. > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
IO Board Status
Virtual Inputs > Virtual Inp.Latched
Virtual Inp.SR
Virtual Outputs
Remote Outputs (for DNA
IEC61850 models only) > User St
GOOSE Dig Outputs
Remote Inputs for IEC61850 Remote Input
models only)> Remote Devices
GOOSE Dig Inputs
GOOSE Analog Inputs
Analog Inputs > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Virtual out. Latched
Virtual out. Analogue

To enter this menu press the enter key when the option Actual Values is selected in main menu. A secondary level is
displayed with different sublevels as shown on. Pressing Up/down keys select the next level to be displayed, press the
enter key again to enter in next level and press ESC key to return to previous level if desired. This navigation is performed
the same for all the menus in Actual Values. Once the last sublevel is reached, move up and down to visualize the actual
values selected.
One example of data screen for actual values is shown in Figure 4-21: Actual values screen data.
First Line: Header of last level in actual values (Phase Current in the example)
Second Line: Data identifier (in the example PH IOC1 HIGH A, is the pickup signal for the first instantaneous overcurrent
function level high for phase A).
Third line: Status of the displayed actual value.
Fourth Line:Relative position in the menu (it is the first value of 114)

Phase Current
PH IOC1 HIGH A PKP
OFF
(1/114)

Figure 4-21: Actual values screen data

In the Actual Values menus are different types of data; each type of data displays its particular status type (on and off, 0 or
1, OK or fail, analog values, etc.)

4-36 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.5.4 Snapshot events

To enter this menu press the enter key when the option Snapshot events is selected in main menu (). In this menu all the
snapshot events stored can be displayed.
Snapshot events are changes in the relay internal status.
One snapshot event is displayed in two text screens:
The first screen display the status, date and time of the snapshot event: the snapshot event identifier, its status, event
number and the date and time of the occurrence. If the snapshot event identifier does not fit the first line, the whole text is
shown using as well the second line alternating with the status and event number.
The second screen displays currents and voltages in primary values for that particular snapshot event. Ia, Ib, Ic and Ig for
currents and Vab, Vbc, Vca and V0 for voltages. To access the metering screen in snapshot events menu, press the enter
key from the snapshot event first screen. To exit from the metering screen press ESC.
To select different snapshot events to be displayed, press the up-down keys to select the snapshot event and then press
the enter key to enter the metering screen. Press esc to exit the metering screen and return to snapshot events menu.
Figure 4-22: Snapshot event navigation HMI shows an example of snapshot events navigation:

R650 8.00 (8.00) Press the enter key from the default main screen and enter in the main text menu.
General Electric
R650MAKF6G1LOE7LH
19200N81: MODBUS: 254
Enter
Escape
Actual Values Press up-down keys until a single scroll bar character (o) appears in the left part of
Snapshot event Snapshot event header.
Fault report Press the enter key to enter in the snapshot events menu.
View Settings
Enter
Escape
Breaker Closed ON > Select the snapshot event to display using the up/down keys.
St: ON (4/479)
Time: 16:35:02.027
Date: 04/May/2017

Isolated Gnd3 Block> > Once selected the snapshot event, identifier, status, date and time are displayed.
St: OFF (5/479) In the second line St: is showing the status and the relative snapshot index from the
Time: 16:35:01.995 whole recorded number. Third and fourth lines are used to display the time and date of
Date: 04/May/2017 the snapshot event.
Enter
Escape
Ia 0.000 Vab 0.000 Pressing the enter key the metering screen for the snapshot event is displayed.
Ib 0.000 Vbc 0.000 To exit from this screen press the ESC key and return to the snapshot events menu.
Ic 0.000 Vca 0.000
Ig 0.000 V0 0.000

Figure 4-22: Snapshot event navigation HMI

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-37

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.2.5.5 Fault report

To enter the Fault Report menu, press the enter key when the option Fault report is selected in main menu (). This menu
displays information about the last ten faults recorded in the relay.
The relay HMI can handle fault reports stored in the relay in two different ways:
1. Show fault warning messages on the HMI display when the fault is produced. This option is disabled by default. To
enable the display of warning messages from the HMI go to the menu Change Settings > Product Setup > Fault
Report > Show Fault On HMI and select Enable.
2. Save information from the last ten faults in the relay. View in the HMI Fault Report menu
In the first option, when a fault occurs a warning message is displayed including information about the fault in two
screens, one with general fault information, and a second with the measured values at the time the fault occurred.
The fault-warning message must be acknowledged before performing any other operation. In the event of several
consecutive faults, the HMI shows the most recent fault, all faults (up to a maximum of ten faults) must be acknowledged.
In the second option, fault reports can be viewed through the HMI Fault Report menu accessed by pressing the enter key.
The display shows information from the last ten faults, including both general information and metering screens for each
fault. Displayed information starts with the most recent fault, and previous faults can be viewed with the up/down keys.
Displayed information is stored in the relay volatile memory, so if the relay is turned off this information is lost, as also
happens if a Clear Fault Report command is executed. However, saved fault reports stored in the relay non-volatile
memory remain after the Fault reset, and can be obtained from the relay using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, Actual >
Records > Fault report.
If there is no fault report available through the display, the relay shows a Fault report not available message.
The format of the displayed screens is as follows:
Actual Values Select the Fault report menu in text menu
Snapshot event
Fault report
View Settings
Enter
Escape
Fault Report #1 If there is more than one fault record press the up-down keys and select the desired
NAF dist: 0.00 record to be displayed.
Time: 16:35:02.027
Date: 23/Feb/2017

Fault Report #2 First screen with general fault information: Fault report #number, fault type, distance
NAF dist: 0.00 and date and time.
Time: 16:47:03.052
Date: 23/Feb/2017
Enter
Escape
Fault Report #2 Second screen with metering data for that fault record. All this data is a summary from
Ia 0.000 Vab 0.000 the fault report file that can be retrieved via EnerVista 650 Setup software.
Ib 0.000 Vbc 0.000
Ic 0.000 Vca 0.000

Figure 4-23: Fault report navigation in HMI

Possible fault types are as follows:

4-38 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

GROUND Ground faults

AG phase A to ground
ABG phase AB to ground
BG phase BG to ground
BCG phase BCG to ground
CG phase CG to ground
CAG phase CAG to ground
PHASE Phase to phase faults
AB phase A to phase B
BC phase B to phase C
CA phase C to phase A
3PHASE Three-phase faults (shown on the display as 3PH)
NAF Fault type not calculated

4.2.5.6 View settings menu

To enter this menu press the enter key when the option View Settings is selected in main menu (o). A secondary level is
displayed with different sublevels. Pressing up-down keys, select the next level to be displayed (o), press the enter key
again to enter in next level and press the ESC key to return to previous level if desired. This navigation is performed the
same for all the menus in "View Settings". Once the last sublevel is reached, move up and down to see the available
settings.

MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL MAIN SETTINGS MENU
Product Setup >
Communication >
Serial Ports
Ethernet > Ethernet A
Ethernet B
Ethernet E
Redundancy
ModBus Protocol
DNP3 Slave > DNP3 Slave 1..3
IEC 870-5-104
SNTP
PTP 1588
Routing
IEC 870-5-101
Fault Report
Oscillography
Demand
Time Settings
System Setup >
General Settings
Source Volt. Sensing
Load Volt. Sensing
Current Sensing
Recloser > Recloser Settings
Single / Three -Pole
Misc. settings

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-39

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL MAIN SETTINGS MENU
Protection Element >
Setting Group X >
Phase Current >
Phase TOC High > Phase TOC High 1..3
Phase TOC Low > Phase TOC Low 1..3
Phase IOC High > Phase IOC High 1..3
Phase IOC Low > Phase IOC Low 1..3
Phase Directional > Phase Directional 1..3
Thermal Model > Thermal Model 1..3
Neutral Current >
Neutral TOC > Neutral TOC 1..3
Neutral IOC > Neutral IOC 1..3
Neutral Dir > Neutral Dir 1..3
Ground Current >
Ground TOC > Ground TOC 1..3
Ground IOC > Ground IOC 1..3
Ground Dir > Ground Dir 1..3
Sens. Ground Curr >
Sens. Ground TOC > Sens. Ground TOC 1..3
Sens. Ground IOC > Sens. Ground IOC 1..3
Isolated Gnd IOC > Isolated Gnd IOC 1..3
Sens. Ground Dir. > Sens. Ground Dir. 1..3
Neg. Seq. Current >
Neg. Seq. TOC > Neg. Seq. TOC 1..3
Source Voltages >
Phase UV > Phase UV 1..3
Phase OV > Phase OV 1
Neutral OV > Neutral OV 1..3
Neg. Seq. OV > Neg. Seq. OV 1..3
Load Voltages >
Phase UV > Phase UV 1..3
Phase OV > Phase OV 1
Neutral OV > Neutral OV 1..3
Neg. Seq. OV > Neg. Seq. OV 1..3
Power >
Forward Power > Forward Power 1..3
Directional Power > Directional Power 1..3
Watt Gnd Flt > Watt Gnd Flt 1..3

Frequency >
Underfrequency > Underfrequency 1..3
Overfrequency > Overfrequency 1..3

4-40 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL MAIN SETTINGS MENU
Miscellaneous >
Broken Conductor > Broken Conductor 1..3
Control Elements >
Setting Group
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure.
Pulse Counters
Analog Comparators
Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup
PLC Timer Masks
60 CTS Failure
2nd HRMC Inhibit
Coil Circuit Superv.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-41

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.2.5.7 Change Settings

To enter this menu press the enter key when Change Settings is selected in main menu. A secondary level is displayed
with different sublevels. Press up-down keys, select the next level to be displayed, press the enter key again to enter in
next level and press ESC key to return to previous level if desired. This navigation is performed the same for all the menus
in Change Settings. Once the last sublevel is reached, move up and down to visualize the settings selected.
To change a particular setting, press the enter key on the setting to be modified. After selecting the setting, the value for
that setting appears between brackets. Choose the new value moving up and down. After selecting the appropriate value
press again the enter key to fix that value. To save the new settings, go to the end of the menu press the down key, and
select Press Enter to save settings. Press the enter key inside this menu to save the new settings.

Select the menu Change settings and press the enter key to enter in the next
sublevel.

If there is more than one sublevel, select the next sublevel by pressing the up-down
keys or rotating and pressing the enter key until the last level is reached.

Press the enter key in the function to be modified

-> Group of settings

-> Setting to be modified
-> Value
-> Range and step

Pressing the enter key, value appears between brackets and can be modified
pressing the up-down keys. Pressing the enter key again, the new value is accepted.

Once all settings inside the group have been modified, go to the last screen pressing
the down key. The new settings are then active in the relay.

Figure 4-24: Change settings in HMI

4-42 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.5.8 Date & time

The "Date & Time" menu shows the relay date and time information in the following format:
DST: Daylight Saving Time information
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:Hour:Minutes:Seconds
To modify date and time, press the enter key. The relay shows the year between brackets at the top of the screen. By
pressing the up-down keys, reach the desired value for the year, and press the enter key to select and store that value.
After the year, the relay shows the month. Proceed as in the case of the year. The date & time modification sequence is as
follows:
Press the up-down key to select the "Date and Time" menu and press to enter in it
The date and time data appear in the format described above.
Pressing the enter key the year can be modified pressing up-down key, after
selecting the desired value, press again the enter key to store the value.
"Year"
Date:Day/Month/<Year>
Time:Hour:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Year, Month appears between brackets and can be
modified
"Month"
Date:Day/<Month>/Year
Time:Hour:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Month, Day appears between brackets and can be
modified
"Day"
Date:<Day>/Month/Year
Time:Hour:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Day, Hour appears between brackets and can be
modified
"Hour"
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:<Hour>:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Hour, Minutes appears between brackets and can be
modified
"Minute"
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:Hour:<Minute>:Seconds
After storing the value for Minutes, Seconds appears between brackets and can be
modified
"Second"
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:Hour: Minute:<Seconds>
Once this sequence is completed, these values remain stored in the relay, and the
display once again shows the date at the bottom of the text screen.
Figure 4-25: Change date & time in HMI

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-43

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.2.5.9 Commands
Commands are configured using EnerVista 650 Setup, and they can be executed using the pushbuttons on the relay front.
Use the EnerVista 650 Setup software to configure up to 32 commands with a descriptive text. When executing the
operations from the relay front panel, the operation description is displayed.
Example of commands (operations) executions via HMI

Change Settings Press the enter key when Commands is selected in the display (o).
Date & Time
Commands
Password
Enter
Escape
Command: All the previously configured commands are displayed. Press up-down keys to move
CLOSE BREAKER through the available commands. Press ESC to return to previous level.

Command: Press the enter key to pre-select the operation to execute.

OPEN BREAKER

Enter
Escape
When the message Push Enter for Confirmation appears, press the enter key to
Push Enter for confirm.
Confirmation

Enter
Escape
Once the command has been performed or the time out has expired the Command
Command completed message is shown on the display.
Completed

Figure 4-26: Commands in HMI

4-44 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.5.10 Passwords
The R650 units incorporate independent passwords for protection and control, in order to prevent unauthorized keypad
and display access to the relay.
Settings Password:
This password restricts access to settings changes in the relay protection elements.
Commands Password:
This password restricts access to executing operation commands through the keypad and display.
If the Commands Password is activated, when the user tries to execute an operation, the relay requests this password.
When using single-line diagrams for graphical display models, all objects are not operational until the password is entered,
either by logging in to Login Pwd Commands, or by entering the password in the Commands menu.
Relay settings view, measures, and other monitored information are not password-protected, and can be accessed by all
users.
The password menu is located at the Password option in the relay text menu. This menu includes the following options:
"Login Pwd Settings"
"Logout Pwd Settings"
"Change Pwd Settings"
"Login Pwd Commands"
"Logout Pwd Commands"
"Change Pwd Commands"
"Forgot Password?"
Among the available options in this menu, there are three types of functionality:
Login: For entering the password, either for settings or commands, and enable access to settings
or commands. Once entering the password the relay is no longer password protected, and
access is enabled to settings modification or commands execution.
Logout: Once the necessary setting changes or operation commands have been executed, the
user can log out, so that the relay is password protected again.
Change: Setting or modifying the desired password.
Service Command:
Passwords are restricted for Settings change and Commands execution. To password-protect the relay, it is first
necessary to set the desired password, using the corresponding Change Pwd... menu. The default password is 0000. This
password provides access to the whole relay functionality.
Once a new password has been set, the user must log in to access the protected functionality; otherwise, the relay
requests the password when trying to change settings or execute commands. Once the password is entered the relay is
unprotected (as if the user had logged in), and remains so for 15 minutes of inactivity or until the user logs out.

Password range
The valid range for R650 passwords is a number from 0000 to 9999.
The default password is 0000, which provides access to the whole relay functionality. This is the default option for enabling
relay use without using passwords.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-45

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Entering passwords (Login PWD)

This operation is the same for both the settings and commands passwords. The only difference is the access menu. For
entering the password, the user must access the Login menus inside the Password menu.
Login Pwd Settings or Login Pwd Commands:
The relay requests the password with the following message on the screen:
Setting passwd.
Login: < 1000 >
To enter the password, press the up-down key and establish the desired number. Once entered, the selected password
between brackets has been entered, the relay shows the message "Processing passwd. Wait...". If the password is
correct, the relay allows access to the settings change or command execution. It is not necessary to enter the password
every time a change is to be performed. The relay requests the password again after 15 minutes of inactivity. This period
of time is the same that takes the relay to turn off the display backlighting.

Logging out (Logout PWD)

To disable access to settings and commands, the user must logout.
Logout Pwd Settings or Logout Pwd Commands:
For safety reasons, the relay automatically logs out the active user 15 minutes after the last keypad action.

Changing the password (Change PWD commands)

To set a password in the relay, both for settings and commands, the corresponding menu must be accessed inside the
Password menu:
Change Pwd Settings or Change Pwd Commands:
To change the password, the user must first log in with the existing password; if the relay has the default factory
password, this would be 0000.
The relay requests the existing password with the following message:
(Setting or Command) passwd.
Login: < 0000 >
Once the existing password has been acknowledged, the new password must be entered:
(Setting or Command) passwd.
New passwd: < 1000 >
Once the new password has been entered, the relay returns to the general Passwords menu.

Service Command for password recovery

In the event of losing all passwords, the Service Command allows the customer to reset both Settings and Commands HMI
Passwords.
1.- Customer must call the customer support service.
2.- A secret key will be provided by customer support to facilitate the reset
3.- At the moment, the HMI has no passwords for Settings and Commands. The customer can reintroduce new passwords.

4-46 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.5.11 Select main screen

The relay display offers the possibility to select the default main screen. For this purpose, access Select Main Screen
through the HMI. This menu includes the following options:

Logotype

This option selects as main screen the relay logotype including the firmware and boot code versions, the relay model and
the communication parameters for local port COM2.

R650 8.00 (8.00)

General Electric
R650MAKF6G1LOE7LH
19200N81: MODBUS: 254

Figure 4-27: Default logotype screen

Metering
This option shows a Metering screen including the phase and ground currents as well as phase-to-phase voltage, and zero
sequence voltage values, all of them in primary values.

Ia 0.000 Vab 0.000

Ib 0.000 Vbc 0.000
Ic 0.000 Vca 0.000
Ig 0.000 V0 0.000

Figure 4-28: Default metering screen

All
This option alternates in time the two previous options.

4.2.5.12 Select language

Option only available for versions 1.70 or higher than 5.20.
The relay display offers the possibility to select the default language for the relay. For this purpose, access the "Select
language" menu located at the end of the main menu through the HMI. This menu sets the default language of the relay
between English (always available) and second language selected in the relay model.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-47

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.2.6 Graphic display

4.2.6.1 One-line diagram

In models with graphic display default main screen is the single-line diagram. This single-line diagram can be configured
using EnerVista 650 Setup software by choosing the HMI menu inside Relay Configuration (Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > HMI).

5650 5(&/26(5 CONTROLLER

Ia = 0.000 kA Vab =0.000 kV

Ib = 0.000 kA Vbc =0.000 kV

Ic = 0.000 kA Vca =0.000 kV

Freq = 0.00 Hz

Esc: Menu. Enter:Next. :Select

Figure 4-29: One-line diagram

The bottom of the display shows a legend that indicates the possible selections that can be made from this screen.
Esc: Menu. Enter: Next. : Select.

The meaning of these options is as follows:

Esc: Menu.
Press the ESC key to access the relay main menu, similar to the one displayed by the text-display model (R650B).
Press the ESC key again and the menu selection screen (Actual Values, Snapshot events, etc.) is displayed. This main menu
screen is identical to the one described for the text display, with functionality described in section 4.2.5 Text menus.
Intro: Next.
Press the enter key to access the next graphical screen, which in this case corresponds to the primary metering values
screen.
: Select
Once the different switchgear elements have been configured using EnerVista 650 Setup, they can be operated from the
graphic display.
If a single-line diagram has been configured in the EnerVista 650 Setup software, in the HMI option inside the Relay
Configuration menu, the different switchgear elements configured for the display are operative from the graphic display.
By pressing the up-down key, the cursor moves among the elements and blinks on each of them. When an element is
selected by pressing the enter key, the relay indicates the command to be executed, and waits for the command to be
confirmed by pressing the enter key.
The following sections describe only the operation of screens that are specific for the graphic display models.

4-48 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.6.2 Metering screen

The Metering screen displays relay analog measures in their primary values. Available metering values are as follows:

Metering Screen. Total metering 53

Phasor Ia Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ib Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ic Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ig Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Isg Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ia Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ib Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ic Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ig Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Isg Primary 0.000 KA
I0 Primary 0.000 KA

Enter: Next. ESC: Prev :Scroll.

Figure 4-30: METERING SCREEN

As in the rest of graphical display screens, the bottom shows a legend indicating the possible options. In this case, the
options are:
Enter: Next.Esc: Prev. : Scroll.
Intro: Next.
Pressing the enter key to access the next screen, in this case the ALL EVENTS screen.
Esc: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key returns to the previous screen (One-line diagram)
: Scroll.
Pressing the up-down key to access all the Metering values in the screen.

METERING SCREEN ANALOG MEASURES IN PRIMARY VALUES

Phasor Ia Primary V0 Primary Source V0 Primary Phase A Real PwrPri Positive MVarhour
Phasor Ib Primary V1 Primary Source V1 Primary Phase B Reactive PwrPri Negative MVarhour
Phasor Ic Primary V2 Primary Source V2 Primary Phase B Apparent PwrPri Positive MWatthour
Phasor Ig Primary Vab Primary Source Vab Primary Phase B Real PwrPri Negative MWatthour
Phasor Isg Primary Vbc Primary Source Vbc Primary Phase C Reactive PwrPri
Phasor In Primary Vca Primary Source Vca Primary Phase C Apparent PwrPri
RMS Ia Primary Vn Primary Source Vn Primary Phase C Real PwrPri
RMS Ib Primary Va Primary Source Va Primary 3 Phase Reactive PwrPri
RMS Ic Primary Vb Primary Source Vb Primary 3 Phase Apparent PwrPri
RMS Ig Primary Vc Primary Source Vc Primary 3 Phase Real PwrPri
RMS Isg Primary Pos MVarhour Freeze Load Frequency Primary Phase A Power FactorPri
I0 Primary NegMVarhour Freeze Source Frequency Primary Phase B Power FactorPri
I1 Primary PosMWatthour Freeze Phase A Reactive PwrPri Phase C Power FactorPri
I2 Primary Neg MWatthour Freeze Phase A Apparent PwrPri 3 Phase Power FactorPri

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-49

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.2.6.3 All events screen

This screen shows all events that have been produced in the relay. The top of the screen shows its name (All Events), and
the relative and total number of events contained in the screen.

All Events (1/1023)

This legend means that there are a total of events stored in the relay, and that the cursor is located on event number 1.
The information shown on this screen for each event is as follows:
"Hour:Minute:Second:Millisecond" "Event text" "Event status (ON/OFF)"

All Events (1/).

- [ Ready LED ON ] -
16:11:08.035 Ready LED ON ON
16:11:08.017 Breaker Closed ON ON
16:11:08.005 Isolated Gnd3 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Isolated Gnd2 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Isolated Gnd1 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Sens Gnd TOC3 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Sens Gnd TOC2 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Sens Gnd TOC1 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Ground TOC3 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Ground TOC2 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Ground TOC1 Block OFF OFF
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Scroll.

Figure 4-31: All events screen

The screen legend options are:
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Scroll.

Esc: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key returns to the previous screen (Metering screen)

Intro: Menu.
Pressing the enter key accesses the Events menu that offers the following options at the bottom of the screen:
To access the different options in the snapshot events graphic menu, move the cursor from up to down or from left to right.
The selected option is displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the selected option, press the enter key
again.
<NEXT>
Accesses the next available graphic screen (Events ‚ New)
<PREV>
Returns to the general events graphic menu (All Events)
<RELOAD>
Updates all events stored in the relay and returns to the general events screen.
<DETAILS>
Provides access to metering values, and date and time related with the event.

4-50 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

The top of the screen displays a legend with the event text, followed by the date and time, the event status (ON or
OFF), and the event index number related to the complete list of events in the relay, for example (1/1023). The rest of
information provided by the Details screen corresponds to the relay measures in the moment of the event. Metering
values provided in the events are secondary, and voltage values correspond to phase-to-ground voltage.

Ready LED ON
Date: 07/Nov/204 St:ON
Time: 16:11:08.035 (1/)

Phasor Ia Primary 0.000

Phasor Ib Primary 0.000
Phasor Ic Primary 0.000
Line Frequency 0.000
Phasor Ig Primary 0.000
Phasor Isg Primary 0.000
I0 Primary 0.000
I1 Primary 0.000

Enter: Meters. ESC: Prev : Scroll.

Figure 4-32: Snapshot events details screen

To navigate this screen, follow the legend at the bottom of the screen:

Enter: Meters. ESC: Prev. : Scroll.

Intro: Meters.
To access the metering values in the moment of the event, press the enter key. A new metering screen is displayed,
containing the primary metering values in the snapshot event, such as:

Phasor Ia Primary I2 Primary

Phasor Ib Primary Vab Primary
Phasor Ic Primary Vbc Primary
Load Frequency Primary Vca Primary
Phasor Ig Primary V1 Primary
Phasor Isg Primary V2 Primary
I0 Primary V0 Primary
I1 Primary 3 Phase Power Factor
The values shown can be configured in Setpoints > Product Setup > Conf Events.

Once inside the Metering screen, a new legend is shown for each event (Intro or ESC: Prev. U-D (L-R: Scroll); press ESC
return to the Event Details screen, and press the up-down key to access all the metering values contained in the
metering screen of the selected event.
ESC: Prev.
Press the ESC key from the event detail screen to return to the all events screen.

: Scroll.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-51

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Pressing the up-down key moves among all the events contained in the all events screen, allowing a preview of the
details for each of them.
<AT>
When this option is selected, the system marks the event where the cursor is located. A relative time stamp is
performed, in such a way that the selected event, marked with an asterisk (*) between the time and the event name is
set with a relative time of 00:00:00:000 on the top line of the event screen, together with its relative index, and the rest
of events in the screen shows a date/time that relates to the marked event. This operation mode allows a quick
inspection of the relative time passed between several events, which is very useful for analyzing events in the field.
The corresponding legend to this relative event-marking screen is as follows:
Esc: Out At.
The relative event marking is eliminated and the system returns to the general events screen.
Enter: Tag event.
Places the cursor on a different event by pressing the up-down key. Pressing the enter key changes the relative
mark to that new event.

4.2.6.4 New events screen

This screen shows the new events that have been produced in the relay since the last time the New Events screen was
read. The top of the screen shows a "New Events" legend, and the relative and total number of events contained.
Navigation through the different menus in this New Events screen is similar to the one described in the previous section for
All Events. The main difference is that in the case of new events it is necessary to select the RELOAD submenu to update
the screen with new events that have been produced, while in the All Events screen, this refreshment is automatic.
After the new events have been read, selecting the Reload menu, results in the system showing a <No new events
available.> message, indicating that there are no more new events available since the last reading.

4.2.6.5 Alarms panel

Alarms panel can be viewed in all R650 models using communication software EnerVista 650 Setup, however, only models
with graphic display allow access to the alarms panel from the HMI.
The first line shows the relative and total number of alarms existing in that screen. The relative number refers to the alarm
on which the cursor is located, and the total number refers to the total amount of alarms available. The second line on this
screen shows an index that indicates the number of the configured control event that corresponds to the displayed alarm,
followed by the alarm text configured in the Control Events menu inside the Relay Configuration option (Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Control Events).

Alarm Panel (1/3).

#1 OPERATIONS IN LOCAL MODE

7/11/04 16:54:16 OPERATIONS IN LO. ON

7/11/04 16:54:16 GENERAL PICKUP ON
7/11/04 16:54:16 GENERAL TRIP ON

Esc: Prev. Enter: Next

Figure 4-33: Alarms panel in HMI

4-52 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

The rest of the screen shows the different alarms produced in the relay with the date and time when the corresponding
event was produced, followed by the alarm identification text, and its status, active (ON) or inactive (OFF).
In the previous example, the produced alarm is the change to local of the execution of operations (OPERATIONS IN LOCAL
MODE), the date and time when this event has been produced, and its status (ON):
The bottom of the screen shows the legend that indicates how to navigate through the different options available in the
screen.
ESC: Prev.Enter: Next.
ESC: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key, the system returns to the previous New Events screen.
Enter: Next.
Press the enter key to access the available alarms menu, which include the following options.
To access the different options provided by the alarms graphic menu, the user must press the up-down key. The selected
option is displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the selected option, the enter key must be pressed.
<NEXT>
This option provides access to the next available graphic screen (I/O boards)
<PREV>
The system returns to the previous New Events screen.
<ACK>
This option acknowledges the alarm on which the cursor is located.
<ACK ALL>
This option acknowledges all alarms. Alarm acknowledgement through the graphic HMI is considered as through
communication port COM2, as it is considered to be Local in both cases.
When an alarm has been acknowledged, a selection mark appears to the right of its status. Inactive alarms disappear
from the screen once they are acknowledged.

4.2.6.6 Input/output monitoring screen

This is the last screen available in the graphic display. This screen allows viewing the status of the relay inputs and outputs,
as well as emulate inputs (for verification of the logic, or related functions), and contact outputs (to verify wiring).
The format of this screen is shown on the figure below.
The first line shows the name of the screen "I/O Cards", followed by the type and description of the board where the cursor
is located, which appears between selection marks > < and blinking.

IO Card.
Type: 2, Nº IN 8, Nº OUT 8

>F<
G
H
J

Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Chg Card.

Figure 4-34: INPUTS/OUTPUTS GENERAL SCREEN

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-53

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

The navigation legend on this screen is as follows:

Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Chg Card

Esc: Prev.
This option returns to the previous screen (Alarms Panel).
Enter: Menu.
This option provides access to the selected I/O board menu:
This menu includes the following options.
Next
View
Test Input
Test Output
As in previous screens, to access the different options provided by the inputs/outputs graphic menu, press the up-down
key. The selected option is displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the selected option, the enter key
must be pressed.

IO Card F. Type: 2, # IN 8, # OUT 8

Input (ON OFF) Output

0 CC1 8 Va COIL1
1 CC2 9 Vb COIL1
2 CC3 10 Va COIL2
3 CC4 11 Vb COIL2
4 CC5 12 Isense1
5 CC6 13 Isense1
6 CC7 14 SUP21
7 CC8 15 SUP22

next >VIEW< test input test output

Figure 4-35: Input/output viewing screen

<NEXT>
This option brings the system back to the one-line diagram.
<VIEW>
This option shows the real status of all inputs and outputs in the selected board. Depending on the type of board, with
or without supervision, the screen varies depending on the board characteristics.
The first line of this screen shows the slot where the board is located, F, G, H or J, and the type of board. The view
menu differentiates inputs and outputs; the active status (ON) is represented by the lighting of the corresponding
input or output.
The legend at the bottom of the screen indicates how to navigate:
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Chg Card

Esc: Prev.
Returns to the general I/O screen
Enter: Menu.

4-54 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

Provides access to the I/O menu (next, view, test input, test output).
: Chg Card
Pressing the up-down key provides access to the status of inputs/outputs for the different boards available in
the relay.

<TEST INPUT>
This option allows testing the input activation (in emulation mode). The displayed screen is similar to the viewing
screen, but the different relay inputs can be operated.
This screen shows the Input name lit up, showing that this is an Input emulation mode.
The first relay input appears blinking and between brackets; select a different input by pressing up-down key. When
the enter key is pressed, the selected input is activated. Navigation through this screen is indicated by the following
legend:
Esc: Exit Text. Enter: Chg Input.
Esc: Exit Text.
The ESC option returns to the general I/O board menu.
Enter: Chg Input.
Pressing the enter key on the blinking input, this input is activated in emulation mode.
Note: input emulation can only be executed through the TEST INPUT tool on the graphic display.

<TEST OUTPUT>
This option allows testing the output activation in emulation mode. The displayed screen is similar to the viewing
screen, but the different relay contact outputs can be operated to test the wiring.
This screen shows the Output name lit up, showing that this is an output emulation mode.
The first relay output appears blinking and between brackets; select a different output by pressing the up-down key.
When the enter key is pressed, the selected output is activated. Navigation through this screen is indicated by the
following legend:
Esc: Exit Text. Enter: Chg Output.
Esc: Exit Text.
The ESC option returns to the general I/O board menu.
Enter: Chg Output.
Pressing the enter key on the blinking output, this output is activated in emulation mode.
Note: Output emulation can be executed through the TEST OUTPUT tool on the graphic display, and also
through communications using EnerVista 650 Setup software for all R650 models.
: Chg Card
Pressing the up-down key allows to change the selected I/O board in the main I/O screen.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-55

4.3 WEB SERVER CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.3 Web server

4.3.1 Home
The web server in the R650 can be accessed running the Windows explorer, and typing http://xxx.xxx.xx.xxx, where
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the relay IP address, which must be configured in Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings
> Ethernet.
The main screen of the R650 web server shows the different monitoring possibilities for snapshot events, events, alarms,
oscillography, fault reports, data logger and metering values provided by the relay through the web.
In order to access the different functions provided by the web server, click the list name on the left side of the screen.
The web server supports different web server screen languages: English, French, Spanish, Russian and Chinese by pressing
the language button on the top right corner of the main window. Take into account that this selection only changes the
language in the web server screen, all the relay texts, such as snapshot events, control events, etc. are in the language
selected in the relay (see section 4.2.5.12 Select language in this manual).

Figure 4-36: Web server main screen

4-56 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.3 WEB SERVER

4.3.2 Snapshot events

The Snapshot events screen shows all Snapshot events produced in the relay. This screen is refreshed automatically every
minute.
The information provided in this screen includes: first, the relative event index, the lowest index corresponding to the most
recent event; next, the event text that shows the reason for the event, its status, active (ON) or inactive (OFF), and finally the
date and time when the event was produced.
The bottom of the screen shows a Metering screen; clicking on one of the events, the associated metering values are
shown on that screen.

Figure 4-37: Snapshot events screen

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-57

4.3 WEB SERVER CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.3.3 Control events

The control events screen provides access to all events that have been configured in the Control Events screen inside the
Relay Configuration menu of EnerVista 650 Setup.

Figure 4-38: Control events screen

Unlike the case of Snapshot events, in this screen the highest index corresponds to the most recent event. The information
provided is the control event index, the text that has been associated with the event when configured, its status, active
(ON) or inactive (OFF), and its date and time.

4-58 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.3 WEB SERVER

4.3.4 Alarms
The alarms screen provides access to alarms configured in the relay. As in the case of snapshot events and control events,
this screen allows only to view the alarms, but not to acknowledge them.

Figure 4-39: Alarms screen

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-59

4.3 WEB SERVER CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.3.5 Oscillography
The oscillography screen allows obtaining from the relay available oscillography records in that moment.
This screen includes two windows. The first window shows oscillography records available in the relay, identified by an
index, being the highest index the most recent record (oscillography record No 6 in the example below).

Figure 4-40: Oscillography screen

When the oscillography record to retrieve is clicked, the window on the right shows a description of the record header,
indicating its date, time, and the most relevant parameters of the record. Once a record is selected, it is required to press
the Download button. The system then opens a window to allow saving the files in Comtrade format on the PC hard drive.
Once the records have been saved, the system prompts to open the GE-OSC tool (Comtrade record viewer) to view the
downloaded files.

Figure 4-41: GE-osc launch screen

4-60 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.3 WEB SERVER

4.3.6 Fault report

The fault report screen provides access to the last 10 fault reports obtained by the relay. These records are stored
according to an index that marks their position among all records produced in the relay, with a range from 1 to 999,
returning to 1 in case of exceeding the limit of 999. As in the case of oscillography records, the highest index corresponds
to the most recent record.
In the fault report, oscillography and data logger screens, the system requests acceptance of a safety-warning message.

Figure 4-42: Fault report screen

The information provided in this screen includes the date and time when the fault was registered, fault calculations such
as distance to the fault, type of fault, date and time, and the line parameters, as well as the recloser and breaker status
during the fault.
This screen shows also prefault and fault voltage and current primary values. At the top of the screen, associated with the
trigger event number there is a button labeled as INFO. This button displays at the bottom of the screen the events
produced before and after the fault report trigger, providing useful information about the moment when the fault was
produced.
To obtain a text file with all the fault report information, press the Download option and save the file in the computer.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 4-61

4.3 WEB SERVER CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.3.7 Data logger

The data logger screen allows viewing the data logger first and last value retrieval date and allows downloading the data record
files in Comtrade format, by pressing the Download option. Stored files can be viewed later using any Comtrade format viewer.

Figure 4-43: Data logger screen

4-62 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

GE
Grid Solutions

R650 Recloser Controller

Chapter 5: Setpoints

SETPOINTS

5.1 Overview
5.1.1 Setpoint main menu
Table 5-1: Setpoint main menu in EnerVista 650 Setup software:
Product Setup
Communication
Serial Ports
Network (Ethernet)
ModBus Protocol
DNP3 Slave
IEC 870-5-104
SNTP
IEC 870-5-103
PTP 1588
Routing
IEC 870-5-101
ModBus User Map
Fault Report
Oscillography
Data Logger
Demand
Time Settings
Conf Events

System Setup
General settings
Source Voltage Sensing
Load Voltage Sensing
Current Sensing

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-1

5.1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Flex Curves
Recloser
Recloser Settings
Single - Three Pole
Switchgear
Miscellaneous Settings
Protection Elements
Setting Group 1
Setting Group 2
Setting Group 3
Setting Group 4
Setting Group 5
Setting Group 6
Note: All six Setting Groups have the same menu options, as shown below.
Phase Current
Phase TOC High
Phase TOC Low
Phase IOC High
Phase IOC Low
Phase Directional
Thermal Model
Neutral Current
Neutral TOC
Neutral IOC
Neutral Directional
Ground Current
Ground TOC
Ground IOC
Ground Directional
Sensitive Ground Current.
Sensitive Ground TOC
Sensitive Ground IOC
Isolated Ground IOC
Sensitive Ground Directional
Negative Sequence Current
Negative Sequence TOC
Source Voltages
Phase UV
Phase OV
Neutral OV
Negative Sequence OV
Load Voltages
Phase UV
Phase OV
Neutral OV
Negative Sequence OV
Power
Forward Power
Directional Power
Watt Gnd Flt

5-2 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW

Frequency
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Miscellaneous
Broken Conductor
Control Elements
Setting Group
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Recloser Failure
VT Fuse Failure
Pulse Counters
Analog Comparators
Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup
PLC Timer Masks
60 CTS Failure
2nd HRMC Inhibit
Coil Circuit Supervision
Input/Outputs
Contact I/O
Board F
Board G
Board H
Board J
Force Outputs.
Virtual Inputs
Remote Comms (Available for
IEC61850 models only).

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-3

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.2 Product setup

5.2.1 Communication settings

5.2.1.1 Serial ports

Baud rate and parity for COM1 and COM2 serial communication ports.

Product Setup > Communication settings >Serial Ports

Name Default Value Step Range
COM1 Baud Rate 19200 N/A [300 : 115200]
COM2 Baud Rate 19200 N/A [300: 115200]
COM1Parity NONE N/A [NONE:ODD:EVEN]
COM2Parity NONE N/A [NONE:ODD:EVEN]

5.2.1.2 Network (Ethernet)

The Network settings are the Ethernet communication parameters for Port A, Port B and Port E. Depending on the order
code, up to three different Ethernet addresses can be used, The ModBus Slave address used by Ethernet ports is the one
set for COM2.
Table 5-2: Network settings

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS >NETWORK (ETHERNET) NETWORK (ETHERNET)A>

NETWORK (ETHERNET)B> NETWORK (ETHERNET) E > REDUNDANCY
DEFAULT
NAME VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE
IP Address Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IP Address Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IP Address Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IP Address Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]

IP ADDRESS: This setting sets the ports IPv4 address in standard IPV4 format. Note that this setting is only valid on port B if
port A’s REDUNDANCY is set to INDEPENDENT.
NETMASK: This setting sets the ports IPv4 subnet mask in standard IPV4 format. Note that this setting is only valid on port
B if port A’s REDUNDANCY is set to INDEPENDENT.

5-4 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Table 5-3: Redundancy settings

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > NETWORK (ETHERNET) > REDUNDANCY
NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
[INDEPENDENT; LLA; PRP; HSR; RSTP;
REDUNDANCY MODE INDEPENDENT N/A DAISY_CHAIN]
LLA Priority DISABLED N/A [ENABLED; DISABLED]
LLA Timeout 5000 N/A [0 : 600000]
RSTP BRIDGE PRIORITY 32768 N/A [0 : 61440]
RSTP PORT A PRIORITY 128 N/A [0 : 240]
RSTP PORT A PATHCOST 200000 N/A [0 : 2000000]
RSTP PORT B PRIORITY 128 N/A [0 : 240]
RSTP PORT B PATHCOST 200000 N/A [0 : 2000000]

REDUNDANCY MODE: This setting is available only if the hardware has multiple ports. The setting determines if ports A and B
operate in redundant or independent mode. Different options are liste below:

· -Independent: In non-redundant mode, port A and B operate independently with their own MAC, IP address,
mask and gateway.
NOTE: When using more than one Ethernet port, each port must be configured to belong to a different network,
otherwise communications becomes unpredictable.
NOTE 2: When non-redundant mode is selected, MAC address assigned to port A is the same as MAC address
assigned to port E but increased in one unit and MAC address assigned to port B is the same as MAC address
assigned to port A but increased in one unit.
E.g (MAC_portE: 00AFF40A24DA, MAC_portA:00AFF40A24DB, MAC_portB: 00AFF40A24DC)
· LLA (Link Loss) operation: The operation of ports A and B are as follows:
Ports A and B use port A’s MAC and IP address settings while port B is in standby mode in that it does not actively
communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link.
· PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol): ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and combine
information at the link layer. It is intended to only be used if the two ports are connected to separate parallel LAN’s.
In this mode of operation both ports cannot be connected to the same LAN. The receiving devices process the first
frame received and discard the duplicate through a link redundancy entity (LRE) or similar service that operates
below layer 2. Aside from LRE, PRP uses conventional Ethernet hardware but both ports must know they are in
PRP. Both ports of PRP devices operate with the same Internet Protocol (IP) addresses for traffic that uses IP
Management protocols such as Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).
· HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy): ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address
and combine information at the link layer. It is intended to work in a ring topology. In this mode of operation port A
is connected to other device´s port B, and port B is connected to other device´s port A provided that ring topology
is respected. The receiving devices process the first frame received and discard the duplicate through a link
redundancy entity (LRE) or similar service that operates below layer 2. Aside from LRE, HSR uses conventional
Ethernet hardware but both ports must know they are in HSR. Both ports of HSR devices operate with the same
Internet Protocol (IP) addresses for traffic that uses IP Management protocols such as Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP).
· RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol): ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and can
operate with different network topologies. The device operates only with one IP address through these 2 ports
· DAISY CHAIN: ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and operate by chaining one device
with the next one. Note that it is important not to create a loop in this topology. Both ends of the chain can be
connected to different networks. The device operates only with one IP address through these 2 ports.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-5

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

NOTE 3: When LLA/PRP/HSR or PRR mode is selected, MAC addresses assigned to port A and B are the same
between them and a consecutive value of MAC address assigned to port E.
E.g (MAC_portE: 00AFF40A24DA, MAC_portA:00AFF40A24DB, MAC_portB: 00AFF40A24DB)
NOTA 4: When LLA/PRP/HSP/RSTP or DAISY CHAIN mode is selected, the IP configured at
Product Setup > Communication Settings > Network (Ethernet) > Network (Ethernet) A is the one used by
both ports (A and B) to communicate in these modes.

LLA PRIORITY: If this setting is set to enabled, the port A has the priority. If PORTA’s LLA detects a problem with the link,
communications is switched to Port B. Port B is, in effect, acting as a redundant or backup link to the network for port A.

LLA TIMEOUT: This setting is active only when the LLA PRIORITY is set to ENABLED. When the link on primary port is
detected again after it fails, there is LLA TIMEOUT (ms) monitoring time for the health of the network. During this time, the
secondary port remains active. If primary network is healthy for more than LLA TIMEOUT value, the switch over to primary
port is automatic.

RSTP BRIDGE PRIORITY: Specifies the switch (bridge) priority value. This value is used along with the switch MAC
address to determine which switch in the network is the root device. Lower values mean higher priority. The value ranges
from 0 to 65535, with a default of 32768.

RSTP PORTA PRIORITY: This is to determine which ports are used for forwarding. Lower the number means higher
priority. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Default is 128.

RSTP PORTA PATHCOST: This is the assigned port cost value used for the switch to determine the forwarding points.
Values range from 1 to 2000000. The lower the value, the lower the cost and hence the preferred route.

RSTP PORTB PRIORITY: This is to determine which ports are used for forwarding. Lower the number means higher
priority. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Default is 128.

RSTP PORTB PATHCOST: This is the assigned port cost value used for the switch to determine the forwarding points.
Values range from 1 to 2000000. The lower the value, the lower the cost and hence the preferred route.
For this setting change to take effect, a reboot is required.

5.2.1.3 MODBUS protocol

ModBus Slave Addresses for serial and Ethernet communication and the ModBus port number used for ModBus TCP/IP. For
more detailed information go to appendix B in this manual.

Product Setup > Communication settings >ModBus ProtocoL

Name Default Value Step Range
ModBus Address COM1 254 1 [1 : 255]
ModBus Address COM2 254 1 [1 : 255]
ModBus Port Number 502 1 [0 : 65535]

5-6 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.1.4 DNP3 slave

Physical port, Slave Address for DNP, IP Addresses for Masters, TCP/UDP Port, Unsolicited Response parameters, Analog
scale factors and deadbands, message fragment size, Binary input block. For more detailed information go to appendix C
in this manual.
Table 5-4: DNP protocol settings
Product Setup > Communication settings >DNP3 Slave
DNP3 Slave 1 > DNP3 Slave 2 > DNP3 Slave 3
Name Default Value Step Range
Physical Port NONE N/A [COM1:COM2:NETWORK]
Address 255 1 [0 : 65534]
IP Addr Client1 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client1 Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client1 Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client1 Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client2 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client2 Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client2 Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client2 Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client3 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client3 Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client3 Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client3 Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client4 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client4 Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client4 Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client4 Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client5 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client5 Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client5 Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client5 Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
TCP/UDP Port 20000 1 [0 : 65535]
Unsol Resp Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Unsol Resp TimeOut 5 1 [0 : 60]
Unsol Resp Max Ret 10 1 [0 : 255]
Unsol Resp Dest Adr 200 1 [0 : 65535]
Current Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
Voltage Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
Power Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
Energy Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
PF Scale Factor 0.00001 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
Other Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000]
Current Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Voltage Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Power Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Energy Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
PF Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 32767]

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-7

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Product Setup > Communication settings >DNP3 Slave

DNP3 Slave 1 > DNP3 Slave 2 > DNP3 Slave 3
Name Default Value Step Range
Other Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Msg Fragment Size 240 1 [30 : 2048]
Binary Input Block 1 CTL EVENTS 1-16 N/A
Binary Input Block 2 CTL EVENTS 17-32 N/A
Binary Input Block 3 CTL EVENTS 33-48 N/A
Binary Input Block 4 CTL EVENTS 49-64 N/A
Binary Input Block 5 CTL EVENTS 65-80 N/A
Binary Input Block 6 CTL EVENTS 81-96 N/A
Binary Input Block 7 CTL EVENTS 97-112 N/A
Binary Input Block 8 CTL EVENTS 113-128 N/A
Binary Input Block 9 SWITCHGEAR 1-8 N/A
Binary Input Block 10 SWITCHGEAR 9-16 N/A
Default Analog Map ENABLED N/A [DISABLED - ENABLED - EXTENDED]
Analog Input Point 0 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 1 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 2 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 3 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 4 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 5 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 6 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 7 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 8 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 9 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 10 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 11 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 12 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 13 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 14 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 15 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 16 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 17 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 18 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 19 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 20 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 21 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 22 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 23 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 24 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 25 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 26 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 27 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 28 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 29 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 30 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 31 End of list N/A

5-8 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.1.5 IEC 60870-5-104

Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. For detailed information go to Appendix D in this manual.
Table 5-5: IEC 60870-5-104 protocol settings
Product Setup > Communication settings >IEC 870-5-104
Name Default Value Step Range
Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED-ENABLED]
TCP Port 2404 1 [1 : 65535]
Common Addr of ASDU 255 1 [0 : 65535]
Cyclic Meter Period 0 1 [0 : 3600]
Synchronization Event 0 1 [0 : 3600]
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 OCTET1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 OCTET2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 OCTET3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 OCTET4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Function 2 DISABLED N/A
TCP Port 2 2404 1 [0 : 65535]
Common Addr of ASDU 2 255 1 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 OCTET1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 OCTET2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 OCTET3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 OCTET4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 OCTET1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 OCTET2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 OCTET3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 OCTET4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
CURRENT SCALE FACTOR 1 [0,00001; 0,0001; 0,001; 0,01; 0,1; 1; 10;
100; 1000; 10000]
VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR 1
POWER SCALE FACTOR 1 [0 : 65535]
ENERGY SCALE FACTOR 1 [0 : 65535]
PF SCALE FACTOR 0.00001 [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.1-1-10-100-
1000-10000]
OTHER SCALE FACTOR 1 [0 : 65535]
CURRENT DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 65535]
VOLTAGE DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 65535]
POWER DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 65535]
ENERGY DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 65535]
PF DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 32767]
OTHER DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA BINARIES 1000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA DOUBLE POINTS 1500 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA ANALOGS 2000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA COUNTERS 4000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA COMMANDS 3000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA ANALOG PARAMETERS 5000 [0 : 65535]

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-9

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.2.1.6 SNTP

Product Setup > Communication settings >SNTP> SNTP1/SNTP2

Name Default Value Step Range
Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
UDP Port 123 1 [1 : 65535]
Server Ip Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
Server Ip Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
Server Ip Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
Server Ip Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]

The R650 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the R650 can obtain the clock time
over an Ethernet network. The R650 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a
dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Three different modes of SNTP operation are
supported. These modes are unicast, broadcast and anycast.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as an IRIG-B source is connected to the R650, the IRIG-B signal provides
the time value to the R650 clock for as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained
from the SNTP server is used.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, Server IP Oct1...4 must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is set
and the Function setting is “UNICAST”, the R650 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many
time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes forty seconds until the R650 clock is synchronized with the
SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to one minute for the R650 to signal an SNTP FAIL state if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the Function setting to “BROADCAST”. The R650 then listens to SNTP messages sent to
the “all ones” broadcast address for the subnet. The R650 waits up to eighteen minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving
an SNTP broadcast message before signalling an SNTP FAIL state.
To use SNTP in anycast mode, set the Function setting to “ANYCAST”. Anycast mode is designed for use with a set of
cooperating servers whose addresses are not known beforehand by the client. The R650 sends a request to a multicast
group address assigned by IANA for NTP protocol. This address is 224.0.1.1 and a group of SNTP/NTP servers listens to it.
Upon receiving a request each server sends a unicast response to the SNTP/NTP client. The R650 relay binds to the first
unicast message received from any server. Then it continues operating with SNTP/NTP server in unicast mode. Any further
responses from other SNTP/NTP servers are ignored. In unicast mode of operation the chosen time server can go offline, in
that case it takes about one minute for the R650 to signal an SNTP FAIL state and to switch again to anycast mode to try to
find another time server. In anycast mode the R650 tries to send multicast messages up to five minutes before signalling
an SNTP FAIL state.
The R650 relay does not support the multicast mode of SNTP functionality.
R650 accepts time synchronization from up to two different SNTP servers. In order to define number of SNTP servers to be
used, different settings for each SNTP server must be configured in the R650. SNTP1 or/and SNTP2 tab settings shall be
configured.

5-10 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

If only one SNTP server is used to synchronize the relay, SNTP1 tab settings is filled with its corresponding settings. If two
SNTP servers are used, SNTP1 and SNTP2 tabs are filled as follow:
• SNTP1 tab contains settings for the main SNTP server.
• SNTP2 tab contains settings for the back-up SNTP server.
If two SNTP servers are configured, R650 operation mode is described as follow:

Scenario Expected behaviour

SNTP1 server= Available R650 shall be synchronized by SNTP1 server.
SNTP2 server= Available
No alarm
SNTP1 server= Available R650 shall continue to be synchronized by SNTP1 server
SNTP2 server= Not Available No alarm
SNTP1 server= Not Available If SNTP1 server fails, R650 shall get synchronization from SNTP2
SNTP2 server= Available server. When SNTP1 server recovers, R650 shall switch to be
synchronized by SNTP1 server.
No alarm
SNTP1 server= Not Available "Not Synchronized" Alarm appears in local copy
SNTP2 server= Not Available

NOTE: SNTP settings take effect after rebooting the device.

5.2.1.7 IEC 870-5-103 protocol settings

Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. For more detailed information go to 5.13 Section in this manual.

Product Setup > Communication settings >IEC 870-5-103

Name Default Value Step Range
COMM Port NONE N/A [NONE - COM1]
Slave Number 1 1 [0 : 254]
Synchronization Timeout 30 min 1 [0 : 1440]

If COMM Port is set to NONE, IEC 870-5-103 communication protocol is not available.

If the user sets a value different from 0 in the Synchronization Timeout setting, when this timer expires without receiving a
synchronization message, the Invalid bit is set in the time stamp of a time-tagged message.

5.2.1.8 PTP IEEE 1588 protocol settings

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > PTP 1588

Name Default Value Step Range
PTP FUNCTION DISABLE N/A [DISABLE - ENABLE]
PORTA DELAY ADDER 0 1 [0 : 60000]
PORTA DELAY ASYM 0 1 [-1000 : 1000]
PORTB DELAY ADDER 0 1 [0 : 60000]
PORTB DELAY ASYM 0 1 [-1000 : 1000]
STRICT POWER PROFILE DISABLED N/A [DISABLED - ENABLED]
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER 0 1 [0 : 255]
PTP VLAN PRIORITY 4 1 [0 : 7]
PTP VLAN ID 0 1 [0 : 4095]
PTP EPOCH UTC SINCE 2000 N/A [UTC SINCE 2000; UTC SINCE 1970; UTC SINCE 1900]

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-11

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

The R650 relay supports IEEE 1588 version 2.

The relay meets the time accuracy requirements of IEC 61850-5-Ed2 clause 11.1.3.3 time synchronization class T5 (± 1 µs)
and of the IEEE Std. PC37.118.1 Draft 1.6 clause 4.3 (± 1 µs), given an error-free PP input and stable temperature
The relay resynchronizes to a grandmaster slewing at ±2 µs/s when the rate of change of frequency stabilizes. It may
become unsynchronized when the ramp starts or stops.
The relay only supports Peer-To-Peer delay mechanism.

PTP FUNCTION
While this port setting is selected to disabled, PTP is disabled on this port. The relay does not generate or listen to PTP
messages on this port.

PORT A, B PATH DELAY ADDER

The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the time value in this setting prior to the time being used to synchronize the
relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate to the extent practical for time delivery delays not compensated for in the
network. In a fully compliant PP network, the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms compensate for all the
delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, this setting should be zero.
In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these mechanisms, not all
delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time indicated in the message. This
setting can be used to approximately compensate for this delay. However, as the relay is not aware of network switching
that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no setting that is always completely correct for
uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen to reduce the worst-case error to half of the range between minimum and
maximum uncompensated delay, if these values are known.

PORT A, B PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY

Range: -1 000 … +1 000 ns
Default: 0
This setting corresponds to “delayAsymmetry” in PTP, which is used by the peer delay mechanism to compensate for any
difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in unusual cases, the two fibers are of
essentially identical length and composition, so this setting should be set to zero.
In unusual cases where the length of the link is different in different directions, this setting should be set to the number of
nanoseconds the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from
the relay. For instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that
the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9 000 ns and the that the delay from the switch to the
relay is 11 000 ns, then the mean delay is 10 000 ns, and the path delay asymmetry is +1 000 ns.

STRICT POWER PROFILE

Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238™-2011) requires that the relay only select as a grandmaster power profile compliant
clocks, that the delivered time have worst-case error of ±1 µs, and that the peer delay mechanism be implemented. With
the strict power profile setting enabled, the relay only selects master clocks displaying the IEEE_C37_238 identification
codes. It uses a port only when the peer delay mechanism is operational. With the strict power profile setting disabled, the
relay uses clocks without the power profile identification when no power profile clocks are present, and uses ports even if
the peer delay mechanism is non-operational.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.

PTP DOMAIN NUMBER

This setting should be set to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to be synchronized to. A network
may support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number. More commonly, there
is a single domain using the default domain number zero.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.

5-12 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

PTP VLAN PRIORITY

This setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s peer
delay mechanism. In compliance with PP the default VLAN priority is 4, but it is recommended that in accordance with PTP
it be set to 7.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN Priority may have no effect.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.

PTP VLAN ID
This setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s peer delay
mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP. As these messages have a destination address that indicates they are
not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no function, and so may be left at its default value.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN ID may have no effect.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.

PTP EPOCH
This setting sets the reference point from which time is measured.

NOTE: PTP settings take effect after rebooting the device.

5.2.1.9 Routing
A default route and a maximum number of 6 static routes may be configured. The default route is used as the last choice,
if no other route towards a given destination is found.

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > ROUTING

Name Default Value Step
Default RT GWY Oct1 10 [0 : 255]
Default RT GWY Oct2 3 [0 : 255]
Default RT GWY Oct3 32 [0 : 255]
Default RT GWY Oct4 1 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-13

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > ROUTING

Name Default Value Step
Static RT2 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]

5-14 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > ROUTING

Name Default Value Step
Static RT5 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]

The redundancy communications comes with the capability of setting a number of static routes and one default route, which
is used instead of default gateway.
Default RT GWY:
This setting sets the gateway of the default route to be used by IP traffic sent from the relay, if no other route towards a
given IP destination is found.

Note that this setting is only valid on port B if port REDUNDANCY is set to INDEPENDENT.

Static RTX IP: This setting sets the destination IPv4 route.
Static RTX MASK: This setting sets the IP mask associated with the route.
Static RTX GWY: This setting sets the gateway to reach the destination IP route.

Important Notes:
1. Host routes are not supported at present.
2. The route mask has IPv4 mask format. In binary this should be a set of contiguous bits of 1 from left to right, followed
by one or more contiguous bits of 0.
3. The route destination and mask must match.
•This can be verified by checking that RtDestination & RtMask == RtDestination
•Example of good configuration: RtDestination= 10.1.1.0; Rt Mask= 255.255.255.0
•Example of bad configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.1; Rt Mask= 255.255.255.0
4) The route destination must not be a connected network.
5) The route gateway must be on a connected network. This rule applies to the gateway address of the default route as
well.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-15

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.2.1.10 IEC 60870-5-101

Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. For detailed information go to Appendix E in this manual.
Table 5-6: IEC 60870-5-101 protocol settings
Product Setup > Communication settings >IEC 870-5-101
Name Default Value Step Range
IEC101 COM1 DISABLED N/A
Common Addr ASDU1 255 1 [0 : 65535]
Link Address1 255 1 [0 : 65535]
IEC101 COM2 DISABLED N/A
Common Addr ASDU2 255 1 [0 : 65535]
Link Address2 255 1 [0 : 65535]
ASDU Addr Size 2 1 [1 : 2]
COT Size 1 1 [1 : 2]
IOA Size 2 1 [1 : 3]
Link Addr Size 1 1 [1 : 2]
Cyclic Meter Period 0 1 [0 : 3600]
Synchronization Event 0 1 [0 : 1400]
CURRENT SCALE FACTOR 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
POWER SCALE FACTOR 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
ENERGY SCALE FACTOR 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
PF SCALE FACTOR 0.00001 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
OTHER SCALE FACTOR 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
CURRENT DEADBAND 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
VOLTAGE DEADBAND 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
POWER DEADBAND 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
ENERGY DEADBAND 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
PF DEADBAND 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
OTHER DEADBAND 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
IOA BINARIES 1000 N/A [0 : 65535]
IOA DOUBLE POINTS 1500 N/A [0 : 65535]
IOA ANALOGS 2000 N/A [0 : 65535]
IOA COUNTERS 4000 N/A [0 : 65535]
IOA COMMANDS 3000 N/A [0 : 65535]
IOA ANALOG PARAM 5000 N/A [0 : 65535]

5-16 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.2 MODBUS user map settings

The ModBus user map definition. 256 records, selectable from the complete relay ModBus map, from the ModBus user
map. For more detailed information go to appendix B in this manual.

Product Setup > ModBus User Map

Name Default Value Step Range
Address 00 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
Address 01 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
... ...
Address 254 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
Address 255 0000 [0000 : FFFF]

5.2.3 Fault report settings

The fault report module defines the type of fault (three-phase, phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground), and the distance to the
fault. The fault activation signal (FAULT REPORT TRIGG) is programmed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Control
Elements.
The fault report provides fault date, fault type and fault location information.
Information referred to the last ten faults is stored as fault report and available to the user through the EnerVista 650 Setup
software or the web server application. Each fault report includes the following information:
• Fault date and time
• Pre-fault current and voltage in primary values
• Fault current and voltages in primary values
• Fault type
• Distance to the fault (fault location)
• Line parameters
• Recloser and recloser status information
As an option, the Relay offers the possibility to display a fault-warning message on the relay HMI (selectable by setting).

5.2.3.1 Fault report settings

Setpoint > Product Setup > Fault Report

Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Positive sequence impedance module Pos Seq Module 3.00 0.01 Ohm [0.01 : 250.00]
Positive sequence impedance angle Pos Seq Angle 75 1 Deg [25 : 90]
Zero sequence impedance module Zero Seq Module 9.00 0.01 Ohm [0.01 : 750.00]
Zero sequence impedance angle Zero Seq Angle 75 1 Deg [25 : 90]
Line length Line Length 100.0 0.1 km [0.0 : 2000.0]
Display fault on HMI Show Fault On HMI DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
CT Direction CT Direction REVERSE N/A REVERSE-FORWARD

Function permission (Function): Enabling this setting allows to create a fault report
when the FAULT REPORT TRIGG is activated.
Positive sequence impedance module (Pos Seq Module): Value, in ohms, of the line positive sequence
impedance module.
Positive sequence impedance Angle (Pos Seq Angle): Value, in degrees, of the line positive sequence angle.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-17

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Zero sequence impedance module (Zero Seq Module): Value, in ohms, of the line zero sequence impedance
module.
Zero sequence impedance Angle (Zero Seq Angle): Value, in degrees, of the line zero sequence angle.
Line Length: The metering element in kilometers.
Show Fault On HMI: This setting enables or disables the option to display
faults on the Relay HMI.
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables the snapshot event
generation for the fault report element.
CT Direction: Direction of the phase current transformers.
Forward: The polarity of he current transformers is as
the R650 wiring diagram.
Reverse: The polarity of the current transformers is
inverted. Voltage and current are 180º out of phase.
States associated with the fault report (Actual >Status>Records Status > Fault Reports), are shown on Table 5-7: Fault
report states
Table 5-7: Fault report states
FAULT REPORT STATES
FAULT REPORT TRIGG
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS
FAULT DATE
FAULT TYPE
FAULT LOCATION
FAULT REPORT NUMBER

FAULT REPORT TRIGG: The activation of this state initiates the calculation of the fault location and the generation
of the corresponding report.
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS: The activation of this state produces the removal of all faults stored in the relay.
Additionally, all active faults on the HMI display are acknowledged. This signal is
programmed at “Setpoint>Relay Configuration>Control Elements”.
FAULT DATE: Date and time of the last fault.
FAULT TYPE: Type of the last fault produced (3PHASE, AG, BG, CG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, NAF). NAF
indicates that the type of fault has not been calculated.
FAULT LOCATION: Calculated distance to the last fault (the metering element is the same used for setting the
line length).
FAULT REPORT NUMBER: Number of the fault report file saved in the relay’s non-volatile memory, associated with
the last fault produced.

5.2.3.2 Fault report retrieval

Fault report files can be retrieved using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at "http:\\relay IP address".
To obtain fault reports using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, go to Actual > Records > Fault report. The top of the
window shows the number of the last fault report stored by the device (Fault Record Number). Click View header to see the
header of the record selected under Select Record.
Click Download to retrieve the file and save in a selected folder. The file name is “FLTxxx.TXT”, where xxx is the
corresponding record number. Fault report retrieval uses either serial communication (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp).
Fault reports are stored in the relay’s non-volatile memory, so they are accessible from the EnerVista 650 Setup software
or the relay’s web server. The fault report is a text file named FLTxxx.txt where xxx is the record number, with a range of
001 to 999. Only files from the 10 last faults are stored. If there are already ten files stored and a new fault occurs, the new
fault overwrites the oldest one. If Show Fault on HMI is enabled, real-time fault information is also displayed on the HMI.

5-18 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

When a fault is produced and a warning message is displayed on the HMI, fault information alternates between two
separate screens: one with general information, and a second with the fault metering values. This screen needs to be
acknowledged by the user to exit the fault report screen. If several consecutive faults are produced, the HMI displays the
most recent one. Each stored fault needs to be acknowledged (up to a maximum of 10 faults). The HMI menu offers an
option to view the last 10 faults produced, with both the general information screen and the metering screen available for
each fault.

5.2.4 Oscillography settings

Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
This trigger can be configured with a programmable logic operand.
Oscillography records are stored in COMTRADE ASCII - IEEE C37.111-1999 standard format.
The oscillography module is in charge of storing the instantaneous values of the 9 analog signals and the 16
programmable digital signals at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Oscillography in fault conditions (OSCILLO TRIGGER
signal activation).
All oscillography records store all analog signals (fixed) plus 16 digital signals (programmable). The order of storage in the
case of analog signals is as follows:
Analog 1 IA channel.
Analog 2 IB channel.
Analog 3 IC channel.
Analog 4 IG channel.
Analog 5 ISG channel.
Analog 6 Load Va or Vab channel, depending on the selected configuration at Setpoint > System Setup > Load
Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Connection.
Analog 7 Load Vb or Vbc channel, depending on the selected configuration at Setpoint > System Setup > Load
Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Connection.
Analog 8 Load Vc or Vca channel, depending on the selected configuration at Setpoint > System Setup > Load
Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Connection.
Analog 9 Source Va or Vab channel, depending on the selected configuration at Setpoint > System Setup > Source
Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Connection.
Analog 10 Source Vb or Vbc channel, depending on the selected configuration at Setpoint > System Setup > Source
Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Connection.
Analog 11 Source Vc or Vca channel, depending on the selected configuration at Setpoint > System Setup > Source
Voltage Sensing > Phase VT Connection.
The 16 digital channels and the oscillography trigger signal are programmable using the EnerVista 650 Setup software at
Setpoint > Relay configuration > Oscillography. Each digital channel can be associated with a single status or to a logic
status. In this last case, the logic must be configured using the PLC Editor tool, at Setpoint > Logic Configuration inside
EnerVista 650 Setup. The oscillography trigger signal can be a single status or a configured logic.

5.2.4.1 Oscillography settings

Setpoint > Product Setup > Oscillography

Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function Permission Function ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Prefault Trigger Position 30 1% [5 : 95]
Samples per cycle Samples/Cycle 64 N/A [4 – 8 – 16 –32 – 64]
Maximum number of oscillos Max. Number Osc. 4 1 oscillo [1 : 20]
Automatic oscillography overwrite Automatic Overwrite DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-19

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Function Permission (Function): Enabling this setting allows to create an oscillography record when the “TRIGGER
OSCILLO” signal is activated.
Trigger Position: This setting defines the prefault data (in percentage) stored every time a new oscillo is
produced.
Samples/Cycle: This setting defines the number of samples per cycle stored in each oscillography
record.
Maximum Number of Oscillos (Max. Number Osc.):
1 to 20 oscillography records can be selected.
Automatic Overwrite: This setting allows chained oscillographies during the fault (TRIGGER OSCILLO signal
activated). The oscillography module is reset once the data has been completely
stored in Flash memory and the TRIGGER OSCILLO state is deactivated.
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables snapshot event generation for the oscillography
element.

Oscillography files calculations

The overall maximum samples capacity is allocated for 27594 samples. The size of each oscillography file depends on the
configured number of oscillographies and is evenly distributed based on the maximum samples value using these
formulas:

Number of samples per oscillography = (27594 samples)/(Max. Number Osc. setpoint)

Number of cycles per oscillography = (Number of samples per oscillography)/(Samples / Cycle setpoint).

After a change in oscillography settings all oscillography files stored on the flash memory are
NOTICE erased.
EXAMPLE

For a Max. Number Osc. of 4, each record stores 27594 / 4 = 6898 samples per stored oscillo.

If we set the Samples /Cycle setpoint to 64 samples per cycle, each record stores up to 6898 / 64 = 107.78 signal cycles.
This value expressed in terms of time is:
For 50 Hz: 204.79 cycles x 20 ms/cycle = 4095.8 ms.
For 60 Hz: 204.79 cycles x 16.67 ms/cycle = 3413 ms.

5.2.4.2 Oscillography states

OSCILLOGRAPHY STATES
OSC DIG CHANNEL 1
OSC DIG CHANNEL 2
OSC DIG CHANNEL 3
OSC DIG CHANNEL 4
OSC DIG CHANNEL 5
OSC DIG CHANNEL 6
OSC DIG CHANNEL 7
OSC DIG CHANNEL 8
OSC DIG CHANNEL 9
OSC DIG CHANNEL 10
OSC DIG CHANNEL 11
OSC DIG CHANNEL 12

5-20 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

OSC DIG CHANNEL 13

OSC DIG CHANNEL 14
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
OSCILLO TRIGGER
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS
CYCLES PER RECORD
AVAILABLE RECORDS

OSC DIGITAL CHANNEL XX: These states are configured at “Setpoint>Relay configuration>Oscillography”. Each
of these states can be associated with a protection state or to a virtual output. Each
oscillography record reflects the changes experienced by this state during the record.
OSCILLO TRIGGER: The activation of this state produces the oscillography record capture. Each record
uses a percentage of its capacity to store prefault information. This percentage is
selected in the Trigger Position setting, and the rest of the record’s capacity stores
post-fault information.
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: This is the number of the most recent oscillography record stored in the relay. The
record is stored in COMTRADE format. The range is 0 to 999.
CYCLES PER RECORD: This state displays the number of cycles that are stored in each oscillography record.
Although the number of cycles can be a decimal number, the record represents only
the integer part.
AVAILABLE RECORDS: This shows the number of records stored in the relay, which can be retrieved by serial
communication (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp). The range is 0 to 20.

5.2.4.3 Oscillography file retrieval

Oscillography files can be retrieved using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at “http:\\relay IP address”.
To obtain the oscillography records using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, go to “Actual>Records>Waveform capture”.
The top of the window shows the number of the last oscillography record stored by the device (Newest Record Number),
followed by the maximum number of oscillos available (Available Records in Device). Click View header to show the header
of the record selected at Select Record.
Click Download and the three files (*.DAT, *.HDR, *.CFG) that form the oscillography record in the COMTRADE standard are
retrieved and viewed automatically if the GE-OSC software is installed in the computer. Retrieved oscillography records
can be viewed using any Comtrade viewer. The EnerVista 650 Setup software stores oscillography records in the folder
“.\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\osc” by default, in the same directory where the program is installed. The file names are
“OSCxxx.DAT”, “OSCxxx.CFG”, “OSCxxx.HDR”, where xxx is the corresponding record number. The oscillography record
retrieval uses serial communication (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp).

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-21

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.2.5 Data logger settings

The R650 data logger can store information from up to 16 analog channels, among all channels available in the relay, with
a selectable sampling rate. The memory of the data logger is fixed at 64 Kilobytes with two bytes needed per channel. The
selected channels take all available memory space, therefore, the number of days of storage depends on the selected
number of channels and sampling rate.

5.2.5.1 Data logger settings

Setpoint > Product Setup > Data Logger

Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Data logger Rate Data Logger Rate 1s N/A [1 s, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 60 min.]
Data Logger analog channels X Data Logger Chnl X None N/A [None; any available measurement]
Data logger Scale for channel X Data logger Scale X 1s N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000-
10000]

Function permission (Function): This must be enabled to start storing information.

Data Logger Rate: the data logger can be configured in rates of 1 second, and 5, 10, 15,
20, 30 and 60 minutes
Data Logger Analog Channel X (Data Logger Chnl X): Analog Channels programmable in the data logger. The X value has
a range from 0 to 16.
Data logger Scale for channel X: Scale factor for individual X channels. Data selected in each channel
is saved in a signed 16 bit integer, which provides a range of –32,768
to 32,767
Any setting change in the Data Logger erases all stored information.

5.2.5.2 Data logger associated states

States associated with the data logger module (Actual >Status>Records Status>Data logger) are shown in the table
below:

DATA LOGGER STATES

OLDEST SAMPLE TIME
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS
DATA LOGGER DAYS

OLDEST SAMPLE TIME: The Date/time of the oldest state with 6 characters. This is the time that corresponds
to the oldest sample. This value remains constant until the available memory capacity
is exceeded. Afterwards, this value changes according to the sampling rate (Data
Logger Rate).
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: The Date/time of the newest state with 6 characters. This is the time when the most
recent sample was taken. This value is updated according to the sample rate selected.
If no channel has been selected, these settings do not change.
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS: This state shows the number of channels selected.
DATA LOGGER DAYS: This state shows the number of days that can be stored. It depends on the Data
Logger Rate setting, and on the number of channels selected.

5-22 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.5.3 Data logger file format and retrieval

File Retrieval
Data logger files can be retrieved using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at “http:\\relay IP address”.
For obtaining the data logger files using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, the user must access “Actual>Records>Data
Logger”. The top of the window shows the date when the oldest sample was taken, and then the date when the newest
sample was taken.
This screen shows the measurements stored for the different channels through the time.
Clicking on the “Download” button, all the information contained in the file can be read.
Clicking on the “Save” button, the data logger files (*.DAT, *.CFG) are retrieved in COMTRADE format, and saved by default
in the folder “...\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\osc”, using “DLGxxx.DAT”, “DLGxxx.CFG” names, where xxx is the corresponding
record number. Data logger files can be retrieved only by Ethernet via 650PC software or by webserver via tftp.
File Format
Data logger information is made of two text files: configuration file (datalogger.cfg), and data file (datalogger.dat).

5.2.6 Demand settings

5.2.6.1 Metering values and settings

The demand calculation is made according to the following primary parameters:

Table 5-8: Primary demand values

PRIMARY DEMAND VALUES STEP
IA (RMS) KA
IB (RMS) KA
IC (RMS) KA
IG (RMS) KA
ISG (RMS) KA
I2 KA
Three phase active power (W) MW
Three phase reactive power (VAR) MVAr
Apparent power (VA) MVA

*Note: The step depends on the selected “Primary Meter Units” in System Setup > General Settings (A_V; KA_KV)
Different integration methods can be selected to calculate current and power values.
Calculated demand values are as follows:
Table 5-9: Demand calculated values
DEMAND CALCULATED VALUES
DEMAND IA DEMAND IG DEMAND W
DEMAND IA MAX DEMAND IG MAX DEMAND W MAX
DEMAND IA DATE DEMAND IG DATE DEMAND W DATE
DEMAND IB DEMAND ISG DEMAND VAR PWR
DEMAND IB MAX DEMAND ISG MAX DEMAND VAR MAX
DEMAND IB DATE DEMAND ISG DATE DEMAND VAR DATE
DEMAND IC DEMAND I2 DEMAND VA PWR
DEMAND IC MAX DEMAND I2 MAX DEMAND VA MAX

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-23

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

DEMAND IC DATE DEMAND I2 DATE DEMAND VA DATE

The relay measures current demanded on each phase, ground and sensitive ground, negative sequence and three-phase
demand for real, reactive and apparent power. Current and Power methods can be chosen separately. Settings are
provided to disable certain measuring techniques. These techniques are used by many utilities for statistical or control
purposes.
Demand module settings are as follows:
Table 5-10: Demand settings
Setpoint > Product Setup > Demand
Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Demand Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Demand method for current CRNT Demand Method THERMAL EXPONENTIAL N/A [BLOCK INTERVAL -
values ROLLING DEMAND -
THERMAL EXPONENTIAL]
Demand method for Power values POWER Demand Method THERMAL EXPONENTIAL N/A [BLOCK INTERVAL -
ROLLING DEMAND -
THERMAL EXPONENTIAL]
Demand interval Demand Interval 5 Minutes N/A [5 – 10 – 15 – 20– 30–60]
Trigger Enabled Trigger Enabled DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

Function permission (Function): This setting enables the demand function.

Demand Method for Current values (CRNT Demand Method): Selection of the demand calculation method for current
values. Available methods are Thermal Exponential, Block interval, and Rolling
Demand.
Demand Method for Power values (POWER Demand Method): Selection of the demand calculation method for power
values. Available methods are Thermal Exponential, Block interval, and Rolling
Demand.
Demand Interval: Integration interval. Available intervals are 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes.
Measurement integration is performed in the period adjusted in the Demand Interval
setting.
Demand Trigger: Operation mode selection for the Block Interval calculation method. This operation
mode depends on the “Trigger Enabled” setting. If trigger enabled is set as disabled,
measurement integration is made in the Demand Interval period. If trigger enabled is
enabled, measurement integration is made during the time interval between two
consecutive pulses of the input assigned as DEMAND TRIGGER INP,. This input is set
at Setpoint > Relay configuration > Protection Elements
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the demand
element.

5.2.6.2 Demand calculation methods

Calculation Method 1: Thermal Exponential

This method simulates the action of an analog peak recording thermal demand meter. The relay measures the magnitude
for each phase (or three-phase, depending on the case) every second, and it assumes that the magnitude remains the
same until the next update. It calculates the equivalent thermal demand using the following equation:

d (t ) =D(1 − e−Kt )
Where:
D Input signal (constant).

5-24 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

d(t) Demand value after applying the input value during time t (in minutes)
K 2.3 / thermal 90% response time
Illustrated bellow is the curve with a 90% characteristic time of 15 minutes. A setting establishes the time to reach 90% of
a steady-state value, just as the response time of an analog instrument. A steady-state valve applied for twice the
response time indicates 99% of the value.

Calculation Method 2: Rolling Demand.

This method calculates the linear average of the quantity over the set demand time interval. The calculation is made every
second. The value is updated every minute and indicates the demand over the time interval just preceding the time of
update.

Calculation Method 3: Block Interval

The Block Interval operation mode depends on the “Trigger Enabled” setting.

Calculation Method 3a: Block Interval – With trigger setting DISABLED.

This method consists on integrating the measurements during the time period specified in the DEMAND INTERVAL
setting. The calculation is made every second and the demand value is the average of all values produced during the
time interval. The time interval is chosen in the DEMAND INTERVAL setting. The interval demand value is shown once
this time has expired.
If, for example, the setting indicates 15 minutes for integration, the demand value update is made every 15 minutes
(although the calculation is made every second). This method calculates a linear average of the magnitude.

Calculation Method 3b: Block Interval – With trigger setting ENABLED.

The demand value is given by integration of the measurement during the time between two consecutive pulses in the
input assigned. The input is assigned to DEMAND TRIGGER in Relay Configuration. The integration is made every
second with each new measure.
In case the interval between two consecutive pulses exceeds 60 minutes, the relay calculates the demand after 60
minutes from the last pulse, this measure is updated in the status and a new demand count starts. This method
calculates a linear average of the magnitude.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-25

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Figure 5-1: Response to different demand methods shows the behavior of the demand, depending on the Selected setting
for demand calculation.

1,2

0,8

0,6

Input
0,4

0,2

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0,2
Time (minutes)

1,2

0,8
Demand %

0,6

0,4

0,2

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0,2
Time (minutes)

1,2

0,8
Demand %

0,6

0,4

0,2

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0,2
Time (minutes)
Block interval

1,2

0,8
Demand %

0,6

0,4

0,2

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 3
-0,2
Time (minutes)
Rolling demand

Figure 5-1: Response to different demand methods

5-26 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.6.3 Demand function measurements and states

Demand values are available at Actual > Metering > Primary Values > Demand.
Table 5-11: Demand measurements
Name Default Value Step
DEMAND IA 0.000 KA
DEMAND IA MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IA DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IB 0.000 KA
DEMAND IB MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IB DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IC 0.000 KA
DEMAND IC MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IC DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IG 0.000 KA
DEMAND IG MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IG DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND ISG 0.000 KA
DEMAND ISG MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND ISG DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND I2 0.000 KA
DEMAND I2 MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND I2 DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND W 0.000 MW
DEMAND W MAX 0.000 MW
DEMAND W DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND VAR PWR 0.000 MVAr
DEMAND VAR MAX 0.000 MVAr
DEMAND VAR DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND VA PWR 0.000 MVA
DEMAND VA MAX 0.000 MVA
DEMAND VA DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000

*Note: The step depends on the selected “Primary Meter Units” in System Setup > General Settings (A_V; KA_KV)

Demand measurements for current values are as follows:

DEMAND IX This is the demanded value every minute or every integration period, depending on the
selected settings.
DEMAND IX MAX Demanded maximeter; it stores the Maximum demand value until a demand reset is
issued.
DEMAND IX DATE Date of the Maximum demand value
Being X the phase considered in each case.

Demand measurements for power values are as follows:

DEMAND Y This is the demanded value every minute or every integration period, depending on the
selected settings
DEMAND Y MAX Demanded maximeter; it stores the Maximum demand value until a demand reset is
issued.
DEMAND Y DATE Date of the Maximum demand value.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-27

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Being Y the power considered in each case.

W Three-phase active power

VAR Three-phase reactive power
VA Three-phase apparent power

The maximum demanded value is stored in non-volatile memory. It is not cleared when the relay is turned off. When the
relay is turned on again, the maximum values are updated.
States associated with the demand (Actual > Status > Records Status > Demand) are the following:

Table 5-12: Demand associated values

DEMAND ASOCIATED STATES
DEMAND TRIGGER INP
DEMAND RESET INP

Besides the previously considered demand measures, two states are used for demand control:
DEMAND TRIGGER INP Bit type state, Programmable at Setpoint>Relay Configuration>Protection Elements in the
EnerVista 650 Setup software. This signal is used by the Block Interval demand method.
DEMAND RESET INP Bit type state, programmable at Setpoint>Relay Configuration>Protection Elements in the
EnerVista 650 Setup software. When this bit is activated, the demand measures are reset. All
stored values are reset to zero (for demand dates, this value represents January 1st, 2000).

5.2.7 Time Settings

The date and time can be synchronized to a known time using the SNTP protocol, IRIG-B protocol (when it provides UTC
Time) or IEEE1588 and the TIME SETTINGS allow setting the date and time provided by these protocols to the proper local
time on the Real Time Clock.

When there is no SNTP protocol enabled, IRIG-B protocol is not set to UTC Time or IEEE1588 synchronization, the TIME
SETTINGS are not used in the Real Time Clock but are still used to calculate the UTC Time (i.e., for the IEC61850 protocol),
but its behavior is not assumed correct in several critical hour changes because of Daylight Savings Time getting effective.
In these configuration cases, it is recommended to disable Daylight Savings Time.
Table 5-13: Time Settings

5-28 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

The TIME SETTINGS settings are as follows:

LOC. TIME OFFS. UTC:

Is used to specify the local time zone offset from Universal Coordinated Time (Greenwich Mean Time) in hours.

DAYLIG. SAVINGS TIME:

Allow the unit clock to follow DST rules of the local time zone.

DST START MONTH:

Allow to set the start month of the DST from January to December

DST START WEEKDAY

Allow to set the start weekday of the DST from Monday to Sunday

DST START DAY INST:

Allow to set the start day instance from First, Second, Third, Fourth or Last

DST START HOUR

Allow to set the starting hour of the DST (in local time)

DST STOP MONTH

Allow to set the stop month of the DST from January to December

DST STOP WEEKDAY

Allow to set the stop weekday of the DST from Monday to Sunday

DST STOP DAY INST

Allow to set the stop day instance from First, Second, Third, Fourth or Last

DST STOP HOUR

Allow to set the stop hour of the DST (in local time)

IRIG-B LOCAL TIME:

Determines, in case of being enabled, if the IRIG-B protocol would carry the date in local time or else in UTC Time.

IRIG-B FUNCTION:
Setting for enable or disable the IRIG-B protocol

PTP IRIG-B PRIORITY:

If two or more time sources are setup the time source with the higher priority shown in the table below is used where 1 is
considered to be the highest priority. Note that the time source priority of PTP and IRIG-B can be swapped. Setting
changes become active after reboot.

The R650 is capable of receiving a time reference from several time sources in addition to its own internal clock for the
purpose of time stamping events, transient recorders and other occurrences within the relay. The accuracy of the time
stamp is based on the time reference that is used. The R650 supports an internal clock, SNTP, IRIG-B and 1588 as potential
time references.

Regarding the PTP, R650 acts as an ordinary clock, with only Sync and Pdelay_Req messages.

Table 5-14: Synchronization priority table

Time source Priority
PTP 1*

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-29

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

IRIG-B 2*
SNTP 3
Internal Clock 4

The priority of IRIG B and PTP can be swapped

Note:
Synchronization by IEC103, DNP, Modbus and IEC104 is not going to be issued if there is a synch source from IRIG-B,
SNTP or PTP.

5.2.8 Configurable Event Settings

The R650 supports up to 24 configurable event measurements.
When the configurable event settings are changed (Setpoint > Product Setup > Conf Events), any recorded events
already stored in the buffer are cleared to avoid confusion.

Before reading the configurable events, check the settings to confirm which measurements are
NOTICE being recorded, since the settings can be changed.
Table 5-15: s
Setpoint > Product Setup > Conf Events
Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Configurable event 1 EVENT METERING 1 None N/A
... ...
Configurable event 24 EVENT METERING 24 None N/A

5-30 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5.3 System setup

The R650 controller device measures up to 11 channels. The channel's distribution is:
• Five currents inputs: three Phase current inputs, one each Ground/Sensitive ground current input.
• Six AC voltage inputs: Six LEA sensors.
• Three voltage sensors are used to measure the phase voltages of the source side, while the other three sensors are
connected to measure the load voltages. These two set of 3-phase voltages are needed to detect voltage loss in both
side of the recloser. Automatic restorations use the measured voltage in both sides of the recloser to coordinate with
other devices located across the protected distribution line.
During normal loading conditions the three phase currents and voltages are well balanced. The controller is using the
currents and the selected voltages that can be measured from the Load or the source side to compute the electrical power
(apparent, active, and reactive).

5.3.1 General settings

This section determines the settings of the element configuration regarding its connection to the power system.

Setpoint > System Setup > General settings

Name Default Value Range
Device Name R650_1 [<20 ASCII characters]
Nominal Frequency 50 Hz [50 Hz; 60 Hz]
Phase Rotation ABC [ABC; ACB]
Voltage Set Reference Load Side (VLx) [Load Side (VLx);
Source Side (VBx)]
Frequency Reference VI [VI; VII; VIII]
Primary Meter Units KA_KV [KA_KV; A_V]
Snapshot Events DISABLED [DISABLED; ENABLED]

Nominal Frequency: This setting establishes the nominal frequency of the power system. This setting affects all
RMS and DFT values calculated by the device.
Phase Rotation: This setting defines the phase sequence of the power system
Voltage Set Reference: This setting indicates the reference's channel for the power, energy and frequency
calculations. Load Side corresponds to voltage channel inputs defined as VLx (VL_A, VL_B,
VL_C) whereas Source Side corresponds to the voltage channel inputs defined as VBx
(VB_A, VB_B, VB_C).
Frequency Reference: This setting indicates the reference channel for frequency measurement. This setting
affects the frequency measured from the Load and Source side voltage channels.

The R650 calculates the frequency based on the selected channel. However, when the
three phase voltages are connected and higher than the minimum voltage, the frequency
is extracted from the three phases by applying the Park-Clarke transformation for a
better estimation of the frequency and the rate of change measurements.
Primary Meter Units: This setting indicates the unit used for the actual values of the voltages and currents.

KA-KV - The measured values are expressed in kiloAmperes and kiloVolts.

A_V - The measured values of voltage and current are expressed in Amperes and Volts.
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables snapshot event generation.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-31

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.3.2 Source and Load Voltage Sensing

Setpoint > System Setup > Source Voltage Sensing

Name Default Value Step Range
Source VT Ratio 1 [1 : 10000]
Voltage Rated Secondary 8.0 0.1 V [0.5 ; 10.0]
Phase Angle (*) 0.0 º 0.1 º [0.0 º: 359.9º]
Phase VT Connection WYE N/A [WYE – DELTA]
Sensor 1 Magnitude Correction (*) 0.0% fo 0.1% fo [-50.0: 50.0]
Sensor 1 Phase Angle Correction (*) 0.0 º 0.1 º [0.0 º: 359.9º]
Sensor 2 Magnitude Correction( *) 0.0% fo 0.1% fo [-50.0: 50.0]
Sensor 2 Phase Angle Correction (*) 0.0 º 0.1 º [0.0 º: 359.9º]
Sensor 3 Magnitude Correction (*) 0.0% fo 0.1% fo [-50.0: 50.0]
Sensor 3 Phase Angle Correction (*) 0.0 º 0.1 º [0.0 º: 359.9º]

Setpoint > System Setup > Load Voltage Sensing

Name Default Value Step Range
Source VT Ratio 1 1 [1 : 10000]
Voltage Rated Secondary 8.0 0.1 V [0.5 ; 10.0]
Phase Angle (*) 0.0 º 0.1 º [0.0 º: 359.9º]
Phase VT Connection WYE N/A [WYE – DELTA]
Sensor 1 Magnitude Correction (*) 0.0% fo 0.1% fo [-50.0: 50.0]
Sensor 1 Phase Angle Correction (*) 0.0 º 0.1 º [0.0 º: 359.9º]
Sensor 2 Magnitude Correction( *) 0.0% fo 0.1% fo [-50.0: 50.0]
Sensor 2 Phase Angle Correction (*) 0.0 º 0.1 º [0.0 º: 359.9º]
Sensor 3 Magnitude Correction (*) 0.0% fo 0.1% fo [-50.0: 50.0]
Sensor 3 Phase Angle Correction (*) 0.0 º 0.1 º [0.0 º: 359.9º]

Source/Load VT Ratio: This setting describes VT Ratio of the voltage sensors connected to the R650.
Voltage Rated Secondary: Enter the nominal voltage specifies of the secondary side of the voltage sensors.

The value set under this setting is used as the base for per unit calculation.
NOTICE
Phase Angle (*): Enter the phase shift of secondary voltage related to the primary voltage. Due to the
transformation algorithms used for some sensors, the secondary side would keep a
shifted angle regards to the primary voltage. The information of the shifted error provided
by the sensor at nominal frequency system has to be set in this setpoint.
Phase VT Connection: This setting defines the type of VT connection, Wye or delta.
Sensor # Magnitude Correction: The R650 uses magnitude and phase correction factors to correct for manufacturing
tolerances in the line-sensing equipment.

This setting specifies the correction magnitude that must be applied for the measurement
taken from the VT1/2/3 input. The magnitude correction factor is calculated by applying
the equation::
Calculated VT1/2/3 Voltage = (1 + VT1/2/3 Magnitude 100) x Measured VT1/2/3 Voltage
Sensor # Phase Angle Correction: This setting provides the leading phase shift for fine corrections that should be
applied on the voltage measured by the sensor to compensate for angle errors.

5-32 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5.3.3 Current Sensing

Setpoint > System Setup > Current Sensing

Name Default Value Step Range
Phase CT Primary 1000.0 A 0.1 A [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase CT Secondary 1A N/A [1 A; 5 A]
Ground CT Primary 1000.0 A 0.1 A [1.0 : 6000.0]
Ground CT Secondary 1A N/A [1 A; 5 A]
Stv Gnd CT Primary 50.0 A 0.1 A [1.0 : 6000.0]
Stv Gnd CT Secondary 0.2 A N/A [0.2 A]

Phase CT Primary: Enter the rated primary current used in the actual feeder in Amperes.
Phase CT Secondary: Enter the rated secondary current used in the actual feeder in Amperes.
The value set under this setting is used as the base for per unit calculation.
NOTICE
Ground CT Primary: Enter the rated primary current used for ground input in Amperes.
Ground CT Secondary: Enter the rated secondary current used for ground input in Amperes.

Stv Gnd CT Primary: Enter the rated primary current used for sensitive ground current input in Amperes.
Stv Gnd CT Secondary: Fixed at 0.2A.S

The sensitive ground current input [0.2A] is intended for use either with a CT in a source
neutral of a high-impedance grounded system, or on ungrounded systems. On
ungrounded systems it is connected residually with the phase current inputs.

The sensitive ground current input can be connected to a Zero Sequence CT for increased
sensitivity and accuracy when physically possible in the system.

The Sensitive Ground input must only be used on systems where the maximum ground
current does not exceed 500 A.
The value set under this setting is used as the base for per unit calculation.
NOTICE

5.3.4 FlexCurve settings

The relay incorporates 4 user curves called Flex Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are defined by the user in
“Setpoint>System Setup>Flex Curves” menu in EnerVista 650 Setup. User defined flex curves can be selected as an
operation curve in all the time overcurrent functions in the relay.
In the flex curves menu there are 120 points to define a user curve. 40 points for reset (from 0 to 0.98 times the pickup
value) and 80 for operate (from 1.03 to 20 times the pickup).
Table 5-16: FlexCurve settings
Setpoint > System Setup > Flex Curves
Flex Curves A > Flex Curves B> Flex Curves C > Flex Curves D
Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Values for reset points 0.00 pkp Time 0.00xPKP [RST] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
Values for reset points 0.05 pkp Time 0.05xPKP [RST] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
… … … … …
Values for reset points 0.97 pkp Time 0.97xPKP [RST] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
Values for reset points 0.98 pkp Time 0.98xPKP [RST] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
Values for operation points 1.03 pkp Time 1.03xPKP [OP] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-33

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Values for operation points 1.05 pkp Time 1.05xPKP [OP] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
… … … … …
Values for operation points 19.50 pkp Time 19.50xPKP [OP] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
Values for operation points 20.00 pkp Time 20.00xPKP [OP] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
The definition of the curve points can be introduced directly in the Flex Curve settings menu. Alternatively they can be
created using the graphical tool provided by clicking Edit Curve in the Flex curves menu in EnerVista 650 Setup.
In the user curve edit screen (see Figure 5-2: FlexCurves edition), a base curve can be selected, from the Standard Curves
menu. This curve is used as a template to create the user curve. Once the standard curve is viewed, it is possible to make
the user curve (operate, reset or both) reconcile the standard curve, using the Flex curve > set flex curve from the
standard curve, and then modifying any of the points by editing in the table the corresponding value.
The user can also view a different curve model to the one the FlexCurve has been adapted to, and compare both models to
adopt the most appropriate values in each case. If once the user curve has been configured, the user wants to store the
information, the “Flex Curve > Exit with Data” menu must be selected. If the results are not to be saved, the Exit without
Data option must be selected. Now, calculated points must be saved in the Flex Curve using the “Store” option.

Figure 5-2: FlexCurves edition

5-34 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5.3.5 Recloser

5.3.5.1 Recloser settings

The R650 supports two types of reclosers:
• Three separate single-pole reclosers. Each pole can be managed independently from others. This type of recloser is
arranged with three separates coils, one coil per phase. Each phase has open and close commands and separate
open and closed states.
• Three-pole reclosers. The three poles of this recloser are managed by one coil. Open and close commands operate
the three phases of the recloser simultaneously.
The recloser used by the R650 controller is selected under the RECLOSE TYPE setting. Internally, within the R650 each pole
of the recloser is managed as separate switchgear.
The configuration of each pole of the recloser is done under the Reclose/Autoreclose pane. This pane allows the
parametrization of the recloser inputs, openings and closing times and the open and close initiations.
By evaluating the configured inputs of each pole of the recloser, the relay constructs the possible states. All states are
depicted in the next table. The table also shows the equivalences among the states provided for switchgears and the
states of the recloser.

SWITCHGEAR # SINGLE-PHASE THREE-PHASE

SWITCH # OPEN RCL PH A/B/C OPEN RCL 3P OPEN
SWITCH # CLOSED RCL PH A/B/C CLOSED RCL 3P CLOSED
SWITCH # 00 | 11 ERROR RCL PH A/B/C UNDEFINED RCL 3P UNDEFINED
SWGR # FAIL TO CLOSE RCL FAIL TO CLOSE PH A/B/C RCL FAIL TO CLOSE 3P
SWGR # FAIL TO OPEN RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH A/B/C RCL FAIL TO OPEN 3P
SWITCH # NO DEFINED RCL NOT DEFINED PH A/B/C RCL NOT DEFINED 3P

The next diagram summarizes the configuration of the recloser by RECLOSER/recloser settings and the SWITCHGEAR
configuration. See the logic diagram for a better understanding of how the states of the recloser are formed.
As can be seen in the logic, for single phase reclosers the relay provides the open, close and the undefined states per each
phase. For three-phase reclosers only one state is provided to indicate the open, closed and undefined condition.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-35

 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

SETTING
Relay Cfg -> Switchgear PH A SWITCHGEAR NUMBER
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH A OPEN
RCL PH A CLOSED
RCL PH A UNDEFINED
RCL FAIL TO CLOSE PH A
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH A

SETTING
PH B SWITCHGEAR NUMBER
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH B OPEN
RCL PH B CLOSED
RCL PH B UNDEFINED
RCL FAIL TO CLOSE PH B
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH B
SETTING
RECLOSE TYPE
= SINGLE-PHASE
= THREE-PHASE

SETTING
PH C SWITCHGEAR NUMBER
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH C OPEN
RCL PH C CLOSED
RCL PH C UNDEFINED
RCL FAIL TO CLOSE PH C
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH C
Breaker Logic

SETTING
3PH SWITCHGEAR NUMBER

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH A
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND RCL FAIL TO CLOSE 3P
OR
SETTING RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH B OR AND
TRIP MODE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= ONE POLE
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH C
= THREE POLE

OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FORCE THREE POLE MODE
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH A
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND RCL FAIL TO OPEN 3P
OR
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH B OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH C
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH A OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND RCL 3P OPEN
OR
RCL PH B OPEN OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH C OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR RCL 3P CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PHA CLOSE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PHB CLOSE AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR RCL 3P UNDEFINED
RCL PH C CLOSE

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH A UNDEFINED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
RCL PH B UNDEFINED OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH C UNDEFINED

Figure 5-3: Reclose Recloser logic diagram

There are special cases when the open and close commands for single-phase reclosers should be performed
synchronously. Under these conditions, the Autoreclose feature should be forced to open and close the three pole of the
recloser at the same time.
In order to do that, the three pole states of the recloser will be constructed from the individual single-phase configurations
as shown in the logic.

5-36 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

These states are formed when the recloser is forced to trip in "THREE POLE" mode. The TRIP MODE setting is located in
SETPOINT-> SYSTEM SETUP->RECLOSER/recloser->SINGLE/THREE POLE TRIPS.
For three-pole trip mode, the auto-recloser is automatically configured to work based on the 3P states of the switchgear.
This working mode can also be forced by the "FORCE THREE POLE MODE" input. Once this input is raised, the auto-recloser
is forced to work in three-phase mode.
Some applications can allow single phase reclosing only under particular temporary seasons or periods of time when the
system is transferred low power flow. These applications might require a way to change dynamically the tripping logic
and the auto-reclosing's work approach. For these special cases, this input can be used to dynamically force to single-
phase reclosers work as a three phases recloser.
Apart from these states, the Relay Configuration->Switchgear pane provides the configuration and setting for each
switchgear. See Switchgear Settings for further description.

Setpoint > System Setup > Recloser > Recloser Settings

Name Default Value Step Range
RECLOSER TYPE THREE-PHASE N/A [THREE-PHASE ; SINGLE-PHASE]
MAX OPENINGS 1 HOUR 1 N/A [1 ; 60]
RCL WEAR MONITOR FN DISABLED N/A [ENABLED ; DISABLED]
RCL WEAR MONITOR AL 100.0 [20.0 : 100.0]
INT DUTY CURRENT 1 2.00 0.01 kA [0 : 999.99]
INT DUTY OPER 1 44 1 [0: 65000]
INT DUTY CURRENT 2 6.00 0.01 kA [0 : 999.99]
INT DUTY OPER 2 56 1 [0: 65000]
INT DUTY CURRENT 3 12.00 0.01 kA [0 : 999.99]
INT DUTY OPER 3 16 1 [0: 65000]
MAX NUMBER OPENINGS 10000 1 [0: 65000]
MAX INTERRUPTING KA 12.50 0.01 kA [0 : 999.99]
STATISTIC INT NUMBER 5 1 [5 ; 60]
SNAPSHOT EVENTS DISABLED N/A [ENABLED ; DISABLED]

RECLOSER TYPE: The RECLOSE TYPE setpoint specifies the type of recloser controlled by the R650: SINGLE
PHASE reclosers or THREE PHASE reclosers.
For SINGLE PHASE reclosers, three separate switchgears should be used, one per each
phase of the recloser. Under this configuration, the opening and closing of each phase is
controlled separately from the rest of phases. A full description of the configuration would
be shown hereinafter.
For THREE PHASE reclosers, one switchgear is used to the control of the opening and
closing of the three phase recloser.
MAX OPENINGS 1 HOUR: This sets the maximum number of openings per phase allowed in the relay during one
hour; once this value is exceeded, the corresponding alarm per phase signals will be
activated; these values are updated and reset after one hour. Once the maximum number
of openings per hour is reached, the value is not incremented with additional openings
within the hour.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-37

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

RCL WEAR MONITOR FN: This setting enables the reclose contact wear monitor feature. The reclose wear monitor is
computed by taking into account the current that flows previously to the opening of the
recloser. The monitor feature algorithm uses the reclose standard ANSI/IEEE C37.61 -1973
to evaluate the wear of the recloser.
The wear characteristic in the ANSI C37.61, 'Recloser Wear Maintenance Curve' in this
document, is calculated based on the equation:

This equation can be shown graphically where the interrupted current (KA) is on the
horizontal axis, and the maximum allowed operations on the vertical axis. The shape of
this graphic follows a linear trend on a logarithmic sheet:

Reclose Maintenance Curve

10000

1000
Number of Openings / Closings

100

10

1
0.1 1 10 100
Current interrupted KA

This curve defines the maximum numbers of operations allowed for a specific interrupted
current before the maintenance of the recloser shall be performed.
The 'reclose maintenance' equation is taken out from the test 'fault interrupting duty
cycle' provided by manufacturer's recloser. The 'duty cycle' is a standardized opening and
closing test sequence based on the standard ANSI C37.60. It defines the minimum
capability of a recloser to interrupt several numbers of faults at three different current
values. Under this type of test, the manufacturer provides the total duty factor that limits
the number of operations of the recloser before maintenance.
As an example, for VIPER-S recloser, the next table shows the fault interrupting duty cycle provided by G&W Electric:

Percent of Maximum: Approx. Interrupting: No. of Fault:

Interrupting Rating Current Amps Interruptions
15-20% 2000 44 ( 88 )*
45-55% 6000 56 ( 112 )*
90-100% 12000 16 ( 32 )*
Total Number of Fault Interruptions: 116 ( 232 )*

(*) The duty test is established at half-life. Recloser standards allow the manufacturer to test only to "half-life" because of
the expense time and test required of the complete duty cycle of a vacuum recloser.

5-38 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

Other needed parameters to complete the definition of the curve are: Maximum symmetrical interrupting current in KA,
mechanical endurance operations and maximum design voltage.
For G&W VIPER-S specifications these parameters are:

SELECTION OF RATINGS IEEE/IEC

Maximum Design Voltage, kV 15.5 27 38
Interrupting Current, kA rms sym. 12.5 12.5 12.5
Mechanical Endurance, Operations 10k 10k 10k

Based on the ANSI C37.61 -1973 (Guide for the application operation and maintenance of automatic circuit reclosers), the
total wear duty factor is derived from the first table as:
Wear duty cycle at 20% -> (0.20 x 12.5 KA)1.5 x 88 operations = 550
Wear duty cycle at 50% -> (0.50 x 12.5 KA)1.5 x 112 operations = 4375
Wear duty cycle at 100% -> (0.50 x 12.5 KA)1.5 x 32 operations = 1250
Total wear duty factor = 550 + 4375 + 1250 = 6175.
In our example, in order to calculate the number of allowed operations before maintenance at a given rated current, the
total wear duty factor must be added into the equation:
Maximum operations (at current X KA) = 6175 / (current in KA)1.5
For instance, in order to calculate the maximum number of operations allowed at 6KA:
Maximum operations at 6KA (50% of maximum interrupting current) = 6175 / 62 = 172 operations.
Where for 12.5 KA (100 % of interrupting current), the equation yields to 6175/144 = 43 operations.
The 'total wear duty factor' expresses the maximum accumulated value before maintenance. Thus, this value can be
considered as 100% of the capacity of the recloser to perform opening and closing operations.

Wear monitoring
The R650 provides the states 'RCLS PHA/B/C/3P WEAR MON' that measure the accumulated wear duty per phase at each
opening in percentage of total wear duty. When 100% value is reached, meaning the maximum wear capacity is achieved,
the alarm RCLS PHA/B/C/3P WEAR ALARM is raised.
The R650 accumulates the wear duty cycle at each operation by measuring the flowing current values previously to the
opening of the recloser.
The wear duty 'wd (%)' value at each opening is calculated as percentage of the total duty factor by means of next
equation:

For instance, if the reclose is opened at 6KA, using the previous equation, the wd(%) value is 0.238 %. After the opening
operation, the total accumulated wear measurement will be increased by 0.238 %.
The wear monitoring curve is limited by the maximum number of allowed mechanical operations and the maximum
interrupting current in KA.
The maximum number of allowed operations is provided by manufacturer. For VIPER-S recloser this parameter is located
in the third raw of the second table, as 'mechanical endurance'.
Therefore, the minimum wd(%) value that can be accumulated at each operation would be provided by this parameter.
In the R650 settings, this value should be set under the parameter MAX. NUMBER OF OPENINGS.
For G&W VIPER-S recloser, this magnitude is represented as a horizontal line at a value of 10000 in the 'reclose
maintenance curve'. The intersection of both curves stablishes which is the minimum current where the equation is
applied.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-39

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

For the G&W VIPER-S maintenance curve: 10000 = 6175 / I1.5 -> I = 0.7251 KA.
For operations at current values lower than 0.7251 KA, the minimum accumulated wd(%) is limited by the maximum
number of openings line. Thus, the wd(%) can be easily expressed by means of next equation:

For our example, wd(%) = 100 / 10000 = 0.01 %. That is similar to use the current 0.7251 KA in the wear maintenance
equation: wd(%) = 100 x 0.72511.5 / 6175 = 0.01%.
As has been expressed, the equation is also limited by the maximum interrupted current. In our example this value
corresponds to 12.5 KA. This is represented as a vertical line that cuts the monitoring curve in 12.5 KA.
For operations at higher levels of 12.5 KA, the monitoring wear alarm will raise after opening, regardless of the previous
accumulated value.
RCL WEAR MONITOR AL:
The wear alarm is raised when the accumulated 'RCLS PHA/B/C WEAR MON' reaches the
value programmed under this setting. The accumulated wear monitoring values cannot
be increased more than 100%.
The next figure shows the wear monitor capability at 40, 70 and 100%.

Reclose Maintenance Curve

10000

100%

70%

1000 40%
Number of Openings / Closings

100

10

1
0.1 1 10 100
Current interrupted KA

INT DUTY CURRENT 1/2/3:

INT DUTY OPER 1/2/3:
The IEEE C37.60 - 1981 standardized the test required for reclosers in order to provide their life before maintenance. The
values obtained under this test are represented by the fault interrupt duty cycle table. The next table show the values
obtained from three manufacturers:

5-40 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

Type WE (OIL) Type VSA 12 (VACUUM) Type G&W VIPER-S

(VACUUM)
Current in % of Interrupt Nº of Fault Interrupt Nº of Fault Interrupt Nº of Fault
interrupting rating rating (KA) interruptions rating (KA) interruptions rating (KA) interruptions
15-20% 10 KA 28 12 KA 88 12.5 KA 44 (88)
45-55% 10 KA 20 12 KA 112 12.5 KA 56 (112)
90 -100 % 10 KA 10 12 KA 32 12.5 KA 16 (32)
Total operations 58 232 232

The 'interrupt duty cycle' compounds three rows. The first row indicates the number of operations tested by interrupting
from 15 to 20 % of the maximum interrupting current allowed for the recloser. The second one expresses the number of
operations tested at 45 to 55 % of the interrupting rating. The third row contains the number of operations tested from 90
to 100%.
According with Appendix C of ANSI C37.61 -1973, the accumulations of these operations provides the 'total duty factor' of
the recloser. This parameter specifies which the maximum duty cycle is before maintenance.
The R650 provides up to 3 possible settings to introduce the pair Current interrupting rating and Number of operations.
Based on these parameters, the R650 then extracts the 'Reclose Maintenance curve' as explained earlier.
Note: A value of 0 KA in the interrupting duty current or 0 duty operations disables this pair of points for the total duty
calculation.
MAX NUMBER OPENINGS: This is the maximum number of openings allowed by the recloser. This value corresponds
to the maximum mechanical endurance operations allowed by the recloser. The R650
uses this parameter to limit the number of operations for low interrupted currents.
A zero value set in this setting inhibits this characteristic.
MAX INTERRUPTING KA: This setting stabilizes the maximum interrupted current of the recloser. This value limits
the Recloser maintenance curve for higher interrupted currents.
STATISTIC INTEGRATION NUMBER:
This setting determinates the number of openings and closings used for computing the
average values for statistical purpose.
The COIL A/B/C MAX CLOSE and COIL A/B/C MAX OPEN CURRENT are also updated with
the maximum value of current flowing throughout the coil during the selected period.
The values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
MEAN OPEN/CLOSE STATISTICS Units
MEAN OPENING TIME PHA 0.000 s
MEAN OPENING TIME PHB 0.000 s
MEAN OPENING TIME PHC 0.000 s
COIL A MAX OPEN CURRENT 0.00 A
COIL B MAX OPEN CURRENT 0.00 A
COIL C MAX OPEN CURRENT 0.00 A
MEAN CLOSING TIME PHA 0.000 s
MEAN CLOSING TIME PHB 0.000 s
MEAN CLOSING TIME PHC 0.000 s
COIL A MAX CLOSE CURRENT 0.00 A
COIL B MAX CLOSE CURRENT 0.00 A
COIL C MAX CLOSE CURRENT 0.00 A

SNAPSHOT EVENTS: This setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for reclose/recloser
signals.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-41

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Table 5-17: Reclose/Recloser states

Reclose/Recloser State Description

RCL WEAR PH A ALARM Alarm indicating the maximum Recloser wear has been reached on phase A.
RCL WEAR PH B ALARM Alarm indicating the maximum Recloser wear has been reached on phase B.
RCL WEAR PH C ALARM Alarm indicating the maximum Recloser wear has been reached on phase C.
RCL WEAR 3P ALARM Alarm indicating the maximum Recloser wear has been reached, three-phase.
RCL PH A 1 HOUR ALARM Alarm signaling the maximum allowed number of operations has been reached for the recloser
of phase A.
RCL PH B 1 HOUR ALARM Alarm signaling the maximum allowed number of operations has been reached for the recloser
of phase B.
RCL PH C 1 HOUR ALARM Alarm signaling the maximum allowed number of operations has been reached for the recloser
of phase C.
RCL 3P 1 HOUR ALARM Alarm signaling the maximum allowed number of operations has been reached for the recloser,
three-phase.
RCLS PHA/B/C/3P WEAR MON Recloser phase A/B/C wear monitor.
These registers store the accumulated values of the wear duty cycle per phase in percentage of
the total wear capacity. The accumulated wear values are stored in a non-volatile memory.
These values will be reset after receiving a RCL WEAR PHA/B/C/3P RESET

The signals associated with the Recloser can be monitored at Actual > Status > Recloser > Recloser States, and they are
as follows:
Table 5-18: Reclose/Recloser status

Recloser Status Description

RCL PH A OPEN Phase A Reclose/Recloser in open position
RCL PH A CLOSED Phase A Reclose/Recloser in close position
RCL PH A UNDEFINED Phase A Reclose undefined
RCL FAIL TO CLOSE PH A Reclose/Recloser phase A in fail to close condition
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH A Reclose/Recloser phase A in fail to open condition
RCL PH A NOT CONFIGURED Reclose/Recloser Phase A no configured
RCL PH B OPEN Phase B Reclose/Recloser in open position
RCL PH B CLOSED Phase B Reclose/Recloser in close position
RCL PH B UNDEFINED Phase B Reclose undefined
RCL FAIL TO CLOSE PH B Reclose/Recloser phase B in fail to close condition
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH B Reclose/Recloser phase B in fail to open condition
RCL PH B NOT CONFIGURED Reclose/Recloser Phase B no configured
RCL PH C OPEN Phase C Reclose/Recloser in open position
RCL PH C CLOSED Phase C Reclose/Recloser in close position
RCL PH C UNDEFINED Phase C Reclose undefined
RCL FAIL TO CLOSE PH C Reclose/Recloser phase C in fail to close condition
RCL FAIL TO OPEN PH C Reclose/Recloser phase C in fail to open condition
RCL PH C NOT CONFIGURED Reclose/Recloser Phase C no configured
RCL 3P OPEN Three-Phase Reclose/Recloser in open position
RCL 3P CLOSED Three-Phase Reclose/Recloser in close position
RCL 3P UNDEFINED Three-Phase Reclose/Recloser undefined
RCL FAIL TO CLOSE 3P Three-Phase Reclose/Recloser in fail to close condition
RCL FAIL TO OPEN 3P Three-Phase Reclose/Recloser in fail to open condition
RCL 3P NOT CONFIGURED Three-Phase Reclose/Recloser no configured
RCL WEAR PH A ALARM This signal is asserted when the set value for phase A is exceeded
RCL WEAR PH B ALARM This signal is asserted when the set value for phase B is exceeded
RCL WEAR PH C ALARM This signal is asserted when the set value for phase C is exceeded

5-42 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

Recloser Status Description

RCL PH A OPEN 1 HOUR ALARM Alarm maximum number of phase A openings reached in one hour
RCL PH B OPEN 1 HOUR ALARM Alarm maximum number of phase B openings reached in one hour
RCL PH C OPEN 1 HOUR ALARM Alarm maximum number of phase C openings reached in one hour

5.3.5.2 Single-pole and three-pole settings

The R650 design supports both a three-pole recloser and three single-pole reclosers.
A single-pole recloser operates by opening or closing one phase of the distribution line. In the past, single-pole reclosers
were used exclusively for transmission lines. Utilities avoided using single phase reclosing for distribution lines due to the
difficulty of coordination among devices along the feeder and the protection of three-phase loads against unbalances.
However, due to the use of modern IEDs in power distribution systems, single-phase reclosing in conjunction with
coordination schemes now increases the reliability power system protection.
Statistically single line-to-ground faults are the most common type in distribution lines, accounting for about 90% of all
faults. Some studies claim that at least 60% of line-to-ground faults can be cleared using single-pole tripping. Single phase
tripping only opens the affected phase in the fault, so the outage for a single-phase fault can be reduced by two-thirds. For
faults where two phases are affected, the reduction is one-third. All indices used by utilities to measure system reliability
are based on the level of service provided to customers. By using single-pole tripping the reliability can increase
dramatically, and depending on the application, different tripping and reclosing criteria can be used.
When single-pole reclosers are used with a single per phase pole, the main concerns are the voltage unbalance and
current unbalance produced during the opening of one or two phases, and the effectiveness of ground fault protection
under such conditions. For some applications, working in single-phase mode with each phase controlled separately is
allowed and supported by the distribution system. Examples include a blown fuse, damaged switchgear, or a single-phase
unsuccessful reclosing scheme. In other applications, leaving the system working with one phase opened can jeopardize
the reliability of the system, losing coordination among upstream IED devices. In such cases, working with the opening of
one phase is only permitted for a limited period of time, for example during the clearance and reclosing of a single phase
fault.
The R650 uses a single/three pole open detection element that detects single and three pole openings. The states provided
by this element are used in the internal states of the auto-reclosing scheme. In order to provide fully flexible configuration,
these states are also accessible through theR650 logic for use in customized logic schemes.

Setpoint > System Setup > Recloser > Single - Three Pole
Name Default Value Step Range
TRIP MODE THREE POLE N/A [ONE POLE ; THREE POLE]
TRIP MIN SEAL TIME 0.02 0.01 s [0.02 ; 60.00]
YELLOW HANDLE TRIP ENABLED N/A [ENABLED ; DISABLED]
YELLOW HANDLE TIMER 0 0.01 s [0 ; 60.00]
MIN CURRENT SUPV 0.05 0.01 x CT [0.05 : 1.00]
SNAPSHOT EVENTS DISABLED N/A [ENABLED ; DISABLED]

TRIP MODE: This setpoint determines whether single phase-trips are allowed, regardless of the type of
recloser being controlled by the R650.
When ONE POLE is chosen, the states 1P PHASE A TRIP, 1P PHASE B TRIP and 1P PHASE C
TRIP are generated, allowing the logic to manage individual phase trips. This is useful for
SINGLE-PHASE reclosers operating in single-phase auto-reclosing mode.
For THREE-PHASE reclosers the selection of 3 POLE TRIP can be used instead. See the logic
of this recloser function for further information.
TRIP MIN. SEAL IN: This setting establishes the minimum time the operand 1 POLE TRIP or 3 POLE TRIP is kept
after a trip condition is asserted.
YELLOW HANDLE TRIP This setting allows the R650 to trip all phases when one yellow handle input is activated.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-43

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

YELLOW HANDLE TIMER: Reclosers are provided with a yellow handle mechanism used to lock the recloser
manually. Lowering the yellow manual operating handle locks all three phases of the
recloser until the yellow handle is raised to the unlocked position.
The yellow handle condition comes to the R650 through an external input designated as
the YELLOW HANDLE INPUT. The Yellow handle condition is asserted when the yellow
handle timer times out. For reclosers equipped with independent yellow handles per
phase, an external wiring connexion should be used to provide the assertion of the yellow
handle input when any one of the yellow handles is manually lowered.
The yellow handle operation is not supervised by any blocking open or trip input, and
triggers the recloser to trip as soon as this signal is received and the timer has elapsed;
the R650 trips all three phases to avoid an unbalanced trip condition. The next figure
depicts a G&W Electric VIPER-S recloser, with the yellow handle clearly visible.

Figure 5-4: G&W Electric Viper-S recloser

MIN. CURRENT SUPERV: This setting defines the maximum current permitted to detect that a phase of the line has
been de-energized. The proof of current supervision per phase accomplished with the
recloser open condition provides the phase open supervision operand.
SNAPSHOT EVENTS: This setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation.

5-44 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5.3.5.3 Single-pole and three-pole operands

SP PHASE A/B/C OPEN This operand is asserted when reclose has been set to control the three single-phase
reclosers, and the pole of the phase A/B/C of the recloser has been opened (RCL PHASE A/
B/C OPEN) whilst the flowing current of the phase A/B/C is below the minimum current
supervision.
This state is used in the internal logic of the reclose controller.
SINGLE POLE OPEN This operand is asserted when working with single-phase reclosers, where one or two
poles have been opened.
This element should be used to provide blocking or inhibit input to the unbalance and
neutral current and voltage protection functions during the transition of the reclosing
process. For applications where the system is allowed to work with one phase opened, the
blocking should be continuous.
This flag is not asserted when the three-pole phases are opened.
3 POLE OPEN This operand is asserted when the three phases are opened and the current flowing
though phases are below the minimum current supervision set in the MIN CURR SUPERV
setpoint.
This state is provided for single-phase and three-phase recloser configurations.

5.3.5.4 Trip operands

TRIP PHASE A | B | C INPUT This input operand provides, by means of the PLC logic, a way to trip a single phase of the
recloser. The one-pole / three-pole logic checks whether the trip mode has been set to
ONE POLE or THREE POLE MODE. If ONE POLE is chosen, assertion of the TRIP PHASE INPUT
activates the 1 POLE PH A|B|C TRIP operand. The assertion of this state should be used as
the final state to activate the phase coil recloser. It is qualified by the BLK OPEN/TRIP PH
A|B|C input, it should be asserted in order to allow the phase trip condition.
This input is applicable only for single-phase reclosers.
OPEN PHASE A | B | C INPUT This input operand provides, by means of the PLC logic, the way to trip a single phase of
the recloser. Unlike the trip phase input, the OPEN PHASE INPUT operand doesn't consider
the state of the TRIP MODE settings. The assertion of this state triggers the 1 POLE PH
A|B|C TRIP flexlogic operand. This state is also qualified by the BLK OPEN/TRIP PH A|B|C
input, it should be asserted in order to allow the phase trip condition.
This input is applicable only for single-phase reclosers.
TRIP 3 PHASE INPUT This input operand provides, by means of the logic of PLC, the way to trip the three phases
of the recloser. The trip 3 phase input state is qualified by the BLK OPEN/TRIP 3P input, it
should be asserted in order to allow the 3 pole trip condition evolves.
BLK TRIP PHASE A | B | C This input operand provides a way to block single phase tripping. When this input is
asserted, the single-phase trip of the affected phase is blocked. This input can be used as
a way to qualify the Trip Phase input.
BLK 3P TRIP This input operand provides a way to block three-phase tripping. When this input is
asserted, three-phase trips are blocked.

5.3.5.5 Close operands

HOT LINE TAG: The R650 provides a way to interlock all closing commands and automatic reclosing.,
called the HOT LINE TAG feature. The logic linked to the hot line tag is described below and
it is used to block the automatic recloser logic and closing commands of the controller.
The name Hot Line Tag is taken from the manual process of disabling and tagging
reclosers and reclosers when de-energizing an electrical line for maintenance.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-45

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Event: HOT LINE TAG

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
HOT LINE TAG INPUT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR HOT LINE TAG OP

PULSE TIMER
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
2 ms.
HOT LINE TAG COMMAND S NON VOLATILE STORAGE
AND
LATCH HOT LINE TAG STATE

R
Set Dominant
Internal variable saved in
non-volatile memory
.
AND

Figure 5-5: Hot line tag logic diagram

When conducting local maintenance use the "Local" setting "OFF" along with the HOT line tag
CAUTION feature as a secondary means of protection and isolation. This recommendation is in addition to
local safety requirements such as LOTO.
The Hot line tag operation, HOT LINE TAG OP, can be performed in two ways: from the HOT
LINE TAG COMMAND or the HOT LINE TAG INPUT. The assertion of the HOT LINE TAG OP is
prioritized. In order to provide a safer working mode, the status of the HOT LINE TAG is
stored in non-volatile memory, to avoid loss of information during shutdown events.
When the R650 boots-up, the status of the HOT LINE TAG is reestablished, blocking any
attempt to close the recloser until a new HOT LINE TAG COMMAND is issued to remove the
HLT condition.
For increased reliability during line maintenance, the inverse state of the HOT LINE TAG OP
can be assigned to an external contact located in series with the power supply of coils. In
this way, the coils cannot be activated until the R650 device is energized and the HLT
condition removed. The next picture illustrates this possibility:

5-46 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

F17
F18
F19 COIL A1
F20 COIL A2
F21 69_1
F22 COIL B1 Open G&W Viper

OUTPUTS
R650 F23 COIL B2 Coil 1

F24 Close
F25 COIL C1
69_2
F26 COIL C2 Open
F27
Coil 2
F28
F29 Close

F30 69_3
Open
F31 + PS
F32 - PS Coil 3
INPUTS

Close

+155 VDC
G25
G26
G27
G28
OUTPUTS

G29
G30

G25-26 assigned to
NOT( HOT LINE TAG OP )
AUXILIARY
RELAY

Figure 5-6: Hot Line Tag inverse state wiring example

Instead of using a direct connection to the R650 contact output, an auxiliary contact with
higher current flowing capacity on its contacts has been used.
CLOSE 3P: The CLOSE 3P logic operand is the state that is used to close the three-pole recloser. The
logic associated with the CLOSE 3P operand is shown in the figure below.
The Close operand is asserted after the following conditions are fulfilled:
1-The Autoreclose triggers AR CLOSE 3P, or after the assertion of CLOSE 3P INPUT by logic.
2-There are no blocking conditions such as HOT LINE TAG, YELLOW HANDLE INPUT or
BLOCK CLOSE 3P configured in the PLC.
CLOSE PHA|B|C: The state CLOSE PHA|B|C operand is asserted after the next conditions are satisfied:
1-After the assertion of AR CLOSE PHA|B|C by the Autoreclose element or after the
assertion of the CLOSE PHA|B|C INPUT by the logic configuration.
2-There is no blocking conditions such as HOT LINE TAG, YELLOW HANDLE INPUT or
BLOCK CLOSE PHA|B|C asserted.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-47

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE 3P

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
CLOSE 3P INPUT

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND CLOSE 3P

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
HOT LINE TAG OP

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
YELLOW HANDLE INPUT OR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BLK CLOSE 3P

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE PH A/B/C

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
CLOSE PHA/B/C INPUT

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND CLOSE PH A/B/C

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
HOT LINE TAG OP

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
YELLOW HANDLE INPUT OR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BLK CLOSE PH A/B/C

Figure 5-7: CLOSE 3P / PHA|B|C logic diagram

The states 'CLOSE PHA', 'CLOSE PHB', and 'CLOSE PHC', are used to produce straight
closing commands for the poles of the recloser. These states are useful for the single-pole
recloser by configuring the contact output state that operates directly over each phase of
the recloser.
CLOSE 3P / PHA|B|C INPUT: These inputs provide a separate condition to close the recloser, apart from the AR close
operand produced by the Autorecloser logic. The close state produced by any manual or
automatic commands should be configured under the CLOSE 3P/PHA|PHB|PHC operands,
using the provided close logic of the R650.
BKL CLOSE 3P / PHA|B|C: These logic inputs provide a way to block any close operation of the recloser. Any logic to
block the operation of the closing coil should be configured under these operands.
The BLK CLOSE 3P is for three-pole recloser whereas the BLK CLOSE PHA, BLK CLOSE PHB,
BLK CLOSE PHC provides a way to manage separate blocking conditions for single-pole
reclosers.

5-48 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5.3.5.6 Trip states

STATUS DESCRIPTION
SP PHASE A OPEN Phase A Reclose/Recloser opened
SP PHASE B OPEN Phase B Reclose/Recloser opened
SP PHASE C OPEN Phase C Reclose/Recloser opened
SINGLE POLE OPEN One phase or two phases are opened
3 POLE OPEN All three phases are opened
ANY PHASE OPEN Any phase is kept opened
1 POLE PHASE A TRIP Trip operand to open phase A for single-phase reclosers
1 POLE PHASE B TRIP Trip operand to open phase B for single-phase reclosers
1 POLE PHASE C TRIP Trip operand to open phase C, for single-phase reclosers
3 POLE TRIP Trip operand to open the recloser for three-phase reclosers
OPEN PHASE A Open/Trip Operand used by logic to open the phase A.
OPEN PHASE B Open/Trip Operand used by logic to open the phase B.
OPEN PHASE C Open/Trip Operand used by logic to open the phase C.
3 POLE OPEN Open/Trip Operand used by logic to open the three-phase
reclosers

5.3.5.7 Close states

STATUS DESCRIPTION
YELLOW HANDLE INPUT Input operand to provide the status of the YELLOW HANDLE
from recloser
HOT LINE TAG INPUT Configurable input to provide the HOT LINE TAG condition
HOT LINE TAG OP Output from the HOT LINE TAG logic that blocks any closing
command to the recloser
CLOSE 3P INPUT Input operand used to send the closing command to the
recloser.
CLOSE PHA|B|C INPUT Input operand used to send the closing command to each
pole of the recloser separately.
BLK CLOSE 3P INPUT When asserted this state blocks any attempt to close the
recloser
BLK CLOSE PHA|B|C INPUT When asserted this state blocks any attempt to close the
affected pole of the recloser.
CLOSE 3P Close operand for three-pole reclosers. This operand should
assert the contact output that close the recloser.
CLOSE PHA|B|C Close operand for single-pole reclosers. This operand should
assert the contact output that close each pole of the recloser.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-49

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.3.6 Switchgear settings

Internal signal generation for the different elements (protection, control, inputs and outputs, switchgear) can be enabled/
disabled in the R650.

Setpoint > System Setup > Switchgear

Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Snapshot Event generation for switchgear #1..12 Snapshot Events SWGR 1..12 DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

The following three logic diagrams show switchgear # configured for PHASE A of the recloser. The same criteria can be
applied for the remaining phases and for a three-phase type recloser.

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN RCL PH A OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH A CLOSED
SETPOINT

OPENING TIME
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
S tPKP S RCL FAIL TO OPEN
SWITCH # OPEN INIT AND
LATCH LATCH

R R
Set Dominant
Set Dominant
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWGR # BLOCK OPENING

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH A OPEN

OR

RESET

Figure 5-8: Switchgear phase A opening logic diagram

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
CLOSE RCL PH A OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH A OPEN
SETPOINT

CLOSING TIME
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
S tPKP S RCL FAIL TO CLOSE
SWITCH # CLOSED INIT AND
LATCH LATCH

R R
Set Dominant
Set Dominant
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWGR # BLOCK CLOSING

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RCL PH A CLOSED

OR

RESET

Figure 5-9: Switchgear phase A closing logic diagram

5-50 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH # A INPUT
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR SWITCH # OPEN

SETTING
CONTACTS

= NONE
= 52 a
AND
= 52 b
=52 a+b FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR SWITCH # CLOSED

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH # B INPUT AND

XOR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

SWITCH # 11 ERROR

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND OR RCL PH A UNDEFINED

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
CLOSE RCL PH A OP AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN RCL PH A OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SWITCH # 00 ERROR

Figure 5-10: Switchgear linked to phase A logic diagram

The signals associated with the switchgear can be monitored at Actual > Status > Switchgear Status > Switchgear #, and
they are as follows:
Table 5-19: Switchgear status

Switchgear Status Description

SWITCH # A INPUT
SWITCH # B INPUT
SWITCH # A STATUS
SWITCH # B STATUS
SWITCH # OPEN Switchgear # in open position
SWITCH # CLOSED Switchgear # in closed position
SWITCH # 00 ERROR Switchgear # in error 00 state.
SWITCH # 11 ERROR Switchgear # in error 11 state.
SWITCH # OPEN INIT
SWITCH # CLOSE INIT
SWGR # FAIL TO CLOSE Switchgear # in fail to close condition
SWGR # FAIL TO OPEN Switchgear # in fail to open condition
SWITCH # NOT DEFINED Switchgear # not defined

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-51

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.3.7 Miscellaneous settings

This section determines the relays status configuration regarding the service and local or remote modes.

Setpoint > System Setup > Miscellaneous Settings

Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Relay Out of Service Relay Out of Service ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Local/Remote Blocked Local/Remote Blocked OFF N/A [ON -OFF]

5.3.7.1 Out of service setting

The unit Relay Out of Service setting is configured in Setpoint > System Setup > Miscellaneous. When this setting is set to
DISABLE, internal logic monitors different internal status/errors and also the Out of Service status. The Out of Service
status can be configured in Relay Configuration > Protection Elements, where any digital signal available in the drop-box
list can be configured as the input.
When internal logic is running, the relay goes into OUT OF SERVICE under the following circumstances:
• If any of following internal errors reports status indicated below:
– Self-Test Memory OK: Status set to 0 which means internal memory is faulty
– Self-Test DSP Fault: Status set to 1 which means that there is a communication error between DSP and the main
processor. After this error occurs, measurements are frozen for 10 seconds and then they drop to zero.
– Magnetics Fault: Status set to 1 which indicates a communication error between DSP and the magnetic module.
After this error occurs, measurements are frozen for 10 seconds and then they drop to zero.
– Logic Fault: Status set to 1 which indicates PLC equations sent to the relay have an error or are incorrect.
– Order Code Fault: Status set to 1 which means the order code and hardware configuration do not match
– Calibration Error: Status set to 1 which means there is a problem in the calibration settings (wrong values).
– Board Status: Status set to 0 indicates that an I/O board is faulty or it does not correspond to the type configured.
When this error occurs due to faulty board, status of inputs/outputs remain as they were just before it went to the
faulty state.
• Or if Out of Service status (Signal configured in Relay Configuration > Protection Elements) is set to 1.

When the Out of Service status goes to ON, or the setting has been changed to Enabled, the ready LED changes to red. Be
careful if the ready LED is linked to an output, because the output will not change its state.
When relay is OUT OF SERVICE, the following services stop working as expected:
• Protection functions will stop working.
• Output will not operate. For example, if an output is closed and the unit goes to the Out of Service state, the output is
kept closed even if the state that closed it changes and would otherwise open the output. When the unit goes out of
the Out of Service state, the output is then opened.
• Measurements will continue to be displayed unless the cause of the OUT OF SERVICE is a Self-Test DSP Fault or
Magnetics Fault.
• PLC will continue running.
• Communications will continue working.
Please, note that if the cause for OUT OF SERVICE is Self-Test Memory OK, this could affect the services listed above.

5-52 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

The following figure shows the flow chart of these states:

Only if there is any change from Enabled to

OUT OF SERVICE Disabled

Only if LOGIC:
FLOWCHART Relay Out Of Service
goes from Enabled to
Disabled

RELAY IN Ready OoS status

SERVICE LED ON OFF

SETTING: LOGIC:
START Relay Out Relay Out
Disabled Disabled
Of Service Of Service

Enabled Enabled

Only if there is a change

OoS status from Disabled to Enabled
ON
RELAY OUT
Only if there is any OF SERVICE
change from Disabled to
Enabled

Ready
LED OFF

5.3.7.2 Local - remote block setting

In the enhanced HMI with USB port new setting has been released in order to be able to lock the Local/Remote front key.
This setting is available via COMS or frontal HMI menu. The settings can be locked by password, so the operator wouldn't
be able to change the local-remote without inserting the password.

Definitions
The value is defined as:
• OFF: The operator is able to change the operations from local to remote or OFF.
• ON: The operator is not able to change the operations from local to remote or OFF.

Settings
The unit is set by the HMI and by 650PC software as it is shown in the following figure.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-53

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.4 Protection elements

5.4.1 Setting Groups
All R650 functions that are affected by setting groups are located in Enervista 650 Setup under Protection (Setpoints >
Protection Elements > Setting Group X). All these functions are grouped into every different setting group available (up to
6).

CURRENT ELEMENTS
Instantaneous overcurrent:
3 x PHASE IOC HIGH (50PH)
3 x PHASE IOC LOW (50PL)
3 x NEUTRAL IOC (50N)
3 x GROUND IOC (50G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND IOC (50SG)
3 x ISOLATED GROUND IOC (50IG)
Time delayed overcurrent:
3 x PHASE TOC HIGH (51PH)
3 x PHASE TOC LOW (51PL)
3 x NEUTRAL TOC (51N)
3 x GROUND TOC (51G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND TOC (51SG)
Negative sequence overcurrent:
3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC (46P)
Thermal image:
3 x THERMAL MODEL (49P)

DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS
3 x PHASE DIR (67P)
3 x NEUTRAL DIR (67N)
3 x GROUND DIR (67G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND DIR (67SG)

SOURCE VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

Phase under/overvoltage
3 x PHASE UV (27P)
3 x PHASE OV (59P)
Zero sequence overvoltage
3 x NEUTRAL OV (59N)
Negative sequence overvoltage:
3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV (47P)

5-54 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

LOAD VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

Phase under/overvoltage
3 x PHASE UV (27P)
3 x PHASE OV (59P)
Zero sequence overvoltage
3 x NEUTRAL OV (59N)
Negative sequence overvoltage:
3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV (47P)

POWER
3 x FORWARD POWER (32FP)
3 x DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)
3 x WATT GND FLT (32N)

FREQUENCY ELEMENTS
3 x OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
3 x UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)

MISCELLANEOUS:
3 x BROKEN CONDUCTOR
The R650 elements incorporate also the following control elements. These control elements are not affected by setting
groups and they are available in Enervista 650 Setup at Setpoints>Control Elements
1 x SETTINGS GROUP
1 x SYNCHROCHECK(25)
1 x AUTORECLOSE (79)
1 x recloser FAILURE (50BF)
1 x VT FUSE FAILURE (VTFF)
8 x PULSE COUNTERS
8 x DIGITAL COUNTERS
20 x ANALOG COMPARATORS
1 x COLD LOAD PICKUP
16 x PLC TIMER MASK
1x 60 CTS FAILURE
1x 2ND HRMC INHIBIT
1x COIL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION

R650 elements incorporate a flexible grouping capability for elements grouped in protection elements section. This
means that protection elements can be used in either one of the following modes:

5.4.1.1 Single setting group

In this operation mode, all protection elements under one particular Setting Group can be activated and operated
simultaneously. When the Setting Group Function is disabled at Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting Group, protection
elements of the group selected as the Active Group become available.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-55

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.4.1.2 Multiple setting groups

In this mode, all protection elements are available in each individual setting group (up to maximum of 6). Only one
configured setting groups is active at a given time. A logic signal, e.g. a digital input, selects which table is active at each
time, providing adaptive protection to each network condition.

The distribution of protection elements in groups is described in Table 5–33:

Table 5-20: DISTRIBUTION OF PROTECTION ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUP 1 SETTING GROUP 2 SETTING GROUP 3 SETTING GROUP 4 SETTING GROUP 5 SETTING GROUP 6
3x50PH 3x50PH 3x50PH 3x50PH 3x50PH 3x50PH
3x50PL 3x50PL 3x50PL 3x50PL 3x50PL 3x50PL
3x50N 3x50N 3x50N 3x50N 3x50N 3x50N
3x50G 3x50G 3x50G 3x50G 3x50G 3x50G
3x50SG 3x50SG 3x50SG 3x50SG 3x50SG 3x50SG
3x50IG 3x50IG 3x50IG 3x50IG 3x50IG 3x50IG
3x51PH 3x51PH 3x51PH 3x51PH 3x51PH 3x51PH
3x51PL 3x51PL 3x51PL 3x51PL 3x51PL 3x51PL
3x51N 3x51N 3x51N 3x51N 3x51N 3x51N
3x51G 3x51G 3x51G 3x51G 3x51G 3x51G
3x51SG 3x51SG 3x51SG 3x51SG 3x51SG 3x51SG
3x46P 3x46P 3x46P 3x46P 3x46P 3x46P
3x49P 3x49P 3x49P 3x49P 3x49P 3x49P
3x67P 3x67P 3x67P 3x67P 3x67P 3x67P
3x67N 3x67N 3x67N 3x67N 3x67N 3x67N
3x67G 3x67G 3x67G 3x67G 3x67G 3x67G
3x67SG 3x67SG 3x67SG 3x67SG 3x67SG 3x67SG
3x27P 3x27P 3x27P 3x27P 3x27P 3x27P
3x59P 3x59P 3x59P 3x59P 3x59P 3x59P
3x47P 3x47P 3x47P 3x47P 3x47P 3x47P
3x59N 3x59N 3x59N 3x59N 3x59N 3x59N
3x32FP 3x32FP 3x32FP 3x32FP 3x32FP 3x32FP
3x32 3x32 3x32 3x32 3x32 3x32
3x32N 3x32N 3x32N 3x32N 3x32N 3x32N
3x81U 3x81U 3x81U 3x81U 3x81U 3x81U
3x81O 3x81O 3x81O 3x81O 3x81O 3x81O
3 x Broken conductor 3 x Broken conductor 3 x Broken conductor 3 x Broken conductor 3 x Broken conductor 3 x Broken conductor

The settings used for setting group management are located in Setpoint >Control Elements > Setting Group
Table 5-21: Setting group settings
Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting Group
Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Setting Grouping Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Active Group Active Group GROUP 1 N/A [GROUP 1 – GROUP 2 – GROUP 3- GROUP 4-
GROUP 5-GROUP 6]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

Setting Group settings are as follows:

Function: Possible values are: [DISABLED – ENABLED]

When this setting is DISABLED, the relay is working in single setting group mode. All protection elements that belong to the
group selected in the active groups setting are available and working at the same time if required.

5-56 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

If this setting is ENABLED, the relay is working in multiple setting groups mode. In this mode, all protection elements of
different setting groups are available to be activated. However, only protection elements of the Active Group selected are
real active ones. In this case, selection of active setting group can be modified through logic signals.
IActive group: Possible values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
This setting indicates which setting group is active by default. Default configuration value is 1.
• When this function is disabled, the Active Group value indicates which setting group of protection elements is
available, e.g if Active Group is GROUP 1, all protection elements under setting group 1 in SetPoint > Protection
Elements are available.
• When this function is enabled, the Active Group value indicates the active setting group when no group is selected as
the active one.
Snapshot events: Possible values are: [DISABLED – ENABLED]

If this setting is ENABLED, Snapshot events related to change of setting groups are reported.
Regarding changing between setting groups when working in multiple setting groups mode, the Relay incorporates
several signals associated with the Protection elements grouping in tables.
First, signals that indicate the group activation:
GROUP 1 ACT ON: This signal produces the activation of setting group 1
GROUP 2 ACT ON: This signal produces the activation of setting group 2
GROUP 3 ACT ON: This signal produces the activation of setting group 3
GROUP 4 ACT ON: This signal produces the activation of setting group 4
GROUP 5 ACT ON: This signal produces the activation of setting group 5
GROUP 6 ACT ON: This signal produces the activation of setting group 6
Priority of activation signals is indicated as follow:
GROUP 6 > GROUP 5 > GROUP 4 > GROUP 3 > GROUP 2 > GROUP 1
E.g: If group 4 and group 1 are selected at the same time, setting group 4 is the active one due to the higher priority level.
As previously mentioned, when no activation signal is selected, the default group set in Enervista 650 Setup under
Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting Group > Active group is the active group.
These activation signals for the different setting groups can be configured using EnerVista 650 Setup at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Control Elements as shown. Different inputs can be linked to different activation signals.

Figure 5-11: Table change signals configuration example

The example above uses six digital inputs to perform the table selection, but it is possible to use any other logic signal in
the relay.
In case of using digital inputs, the user can select the setting table activating these digital inputs (which can come from the
PLC, or from a different relay, or from an auxiliary switch, for adaptive protection). This selection of the active group has
priority over default setting.
The time used in the table change is one PLC logic scan cycle (5 ms typical), allowing a fast adaptation to system changes.
Another type of signal is PROT ACTIVE GROUP, which indicates the active setting group. Protection element settings in the
active group are the values being used by different protection functions.
All actual values signals corresponding to setting groups are located in the Actual > Status > Control Elements > Setting
Groups menu.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-57

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.4.2 Inverse time curve characteristics

Inverse time curves available in time overcurrent elements are as follows:
IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC Curve A/B/C/Long-Time Inverse/ Short-Time Inverse
IAC extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time curves
Rectifier time curves
User Curve - FlexCurve A/B/C/D
Recloser Curves
The saturation level for the user curve is 20 times the pickup value, for the rest of time overcurrent elements the
saturation level is 48 times the pickup.
All these curves follow the standards defined for each of them, allowing an efficient coordination with other devices
located downstream. A dial or curve setting allows selection of a tripping time X times the set time in the selected curve.
Fixing this value to 0 would produce an instantaneous response for any selected curve.
Tripping time calculations are performed on the base of an internal variable called “energy”. This energy represents the
system dissipation capability, that is, when 100% of energy is reached, this means that the tripping time associated with
the curve for a certain current value has expired.
Therefore, once the current value has exceeded the pickup value, the relay starts increasing the energy variable value. If it
reaches 100%, a trip is produced. When the current value falls below 97% of the pickup value, the element is reset. There
are two reset types: Instantaneous and Timed (IEEE) or Linear.
The instantaneous mode provides that, when the current value falls below the reset level, energy is immediately reset to 0.
This mode is used for coordinating with static devices, which behave in a similar way. In the Linear mode, energy is
reduced at a speed associated with the reset times curve (showed in the curve tables), trying to simulate the behavior of
electromechanical relays.

5.4.2.1 IEEE curves

This family of curves follows the standard IEEE C37.112-1996 for extremely inverse, very inverse, and inverse curves. The
following formulas define this type of curve:

Where:
t = Operation time in seconds
Dial = multiplier setting
I = Input current
Itap = Current pickup value
A, B, p = constants defined by the standard
TRESET = reset time in seconds
tr = characteristic constant.

5-58 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

Table 5-22: Constants for IEEE curves

IEEE Curve Shape Name A B p tr
IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE Ext Inv 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Very Inv 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE Inverse IEEE Mod Inv 0.0515 0.1140 0.0200 4.85

Table 5-23: Tripping time in seconds for IEEE curves

Dial Current (I/Itap)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE Extremely Inverse
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE Very Inverse
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE Inverse
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-59

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.4.2.2 IEC curves

This family of curves follows the European standard IEC 255-4, and the British standard BF142 for IEC Curves A, B and C,
IEC Long-Time Inverse and IEC Short-Time Inverse. The formulas that define these curves are as follows:

Where:
t = Operation time in seconds
Dial = multiplying factor
I = Input current
Itap = Current pickup value
K, E = constants defined by the standard
TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated)
tr = characteristic constant.

Table 5-24: Constants for IEC curves

IEC Curve Shape Name K E tr
IEC Curve A IEC Curve A 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve B IEC Curve B 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve C IEC Curve C 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Long-Time Inverse IEC Long-Time Inv 120.000 1.000 120.0
IEC Short-Time Inverse IEC Short-Time Inv 0.050 0.040 0.5

Table 5-25: Tripping time in seconds for IEC curves

Dial Current (I/Itap)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC Curve A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC Curve B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200

5-60 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC Curve C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC Long-Time Inverse
0.05 12.000 6.000 3.000 2.000 1.500 1.200 1.000 0.857 0.750 0.667
0.10 24.000 12.000 6.000 4.000 3.000 2.400 2.000 1.714 1.500 1.333
0.20 48.000 24.000 12.000 8.000 6.000 4.800 4.000 3.429 3.000 2.667
0.40 96.000 48.000 24.000 16.000 12.000 9.600 8.000 6.857 6.000 5.333
0.60 144.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 18.000 14.400 12.000 10.286 9.000 8.000
0.80 192.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 24.000 19.200 16.000 13.714 12.000 10.667
1.00 240.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 30.000 24.000 20.000 17.143 15.000 13.333
IEC Short-Time Inverse
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518

5.4.2.3 IAC curves

This family of curves follows the time response of the General Electric IAC electromechanical relays. The following formulas
define these curves:

Where:
t = Operation time in seconds
Dial = multiplier setting
I = Input current
Itap = Current pickup value
A, B, C, D, E = predefined constants
TRESET = reset time in seconds
tr = characteristic constant.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-61

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Table 5-26: Constants for IAC curves

IAC Curve Shape Name A B C D E tr
IAC Extremely Inverse IAC Ext Inv 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse IAC Very Inv 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 -1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse IAC Mod Inv 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 -0.4180 0.1947 0.990

Table 5-27: Tripping time in seconds for IAC curves

Dial Current (I/Itap)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC Extremely Inverse
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC Very Inverse
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC Inverse
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969

5.4.2.4 ANSI curves

This family of curves complies with the American Standard ANSI C37.90 for Extremely inverse, Very inverse, Normally
inverse and Moderately inverse curves. The formulas that define these curves are as follows:

where:
T = Operation time (in seconds).
Dial = Multiplying factor

5-62 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

I = Input current
Ipickup = Current pickup setting
A, B, C, D, E = Constants
Treset = Reset time (in seconds) assuming a 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated
Tr = Characteristic constant

The different constants that define the above-mentioned curves are:

Table 5-28: Constants for ANSI curves
ANSI Curve Shape A B C D E Tr
ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5 3.0094 0.7222 5.67
ANSI Very Inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.34 -0.284 4.0505 3.88
ANSI Normally Inverse 0.0274 2.2614 0.3 -4.1899 9.1272 5.95
ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8 -0.08 0.1271 1.08

Table 5-29: Tripping time in seconds for ANSI curves

Dial Current (I/Itap)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
ANSI Extremely inverse
0.50 2.000 0.872 0.330 0.184 0.124 0.093 0.075 0.063 0.055 0.049
1.00 4.001 1.744 0.659 0.368 0.247 0.185 0.149 0.126 0.110 0.098
2.00 8.002 3.489 1.319 0.736 0.495 0.371 0.298 0.251 0.219 0.196
4.00 16.004 6.977 2.638 1.472 0.990 0.742 0.596 0.503 0.439 0.393
6.00 24.005 10.466 3.956 2.208 1.484 1.113 0.894 0.754 0.658 0.589
8.00 32.007 13.955 5.275 2.944 1.979 1.483 1.192 1.006 0.878 0.786
10.00 40.009 17.443 6.594 3.680 2.474 1.854 1.491 1.257 1.097 0.982
ANSI Very Inverse
0.50 1.567 0.663 0.268 0.171 0.130 0.108 0.094 0.085 0.078 0.073
1.00 3.134 1.325 0.537 0.341 0.260 0.216 0.189 0.170 0.156 0.146
2.00 6.268 2.650 1.074 0.682 0.520 0.432 0.378 0.340 0.312 0.291
4.00 12.537 5.301 2.148 1.365 1.040 0.864 0.755 0.680 0.625 0.583
6.00 18.805 7.951 3.221 2.047 1.559 1.297 1.133 1.020 0.937 0.874
8.00 25.073 10.602 4.295 2.730 2.079 1.729 1.510 1.360 1.250 1.165
10.00 31.341 13.252 5.369 3.412 2.599 2.161 1.888 1.700 1.562 1.457
ANSI Normally inverse
0.50 2.142 0.883 0.377 0.256 0.203 0.172 0.151 0.135 0.123 0.113
1.00 4.284 1.766 0.754 0.513 0.407 0.344 0.302 0.270 0.246 0.226
2.00 8.568 3.531 1.508 1.025 0.814 0.689 0.604 0.541 0.492 0.452
4.00 17.137 7.062 3.016 2.051 1.627 1.378 1.208 1.082 0.983 0.904
6.00 25.705 10.594 4.524 3.076 2.441 2.067 1.812 1.622 1.475 1.356
8.00 34.274 14.125 6.031 4.102 3.254 2.756 2.415 2.163 1.967 1.808
10.00 42.842 17.656 7.539 5.127 4.068 3.445 3.019 2.704 2.458 2.260
ANSI Moderately inverse
0.50 0.675 0.379 0.239 0.191 0.166 0.151 0.141 0.133 0.128 0.123
1.00 1.351 0.757 0.478 0.382 0.332 0.302 0.281 0.267 0.255 0.247
2.00 2.702 1.515 0.955 0.764 0.665 0.604 0.563 0.533 0.511 0.493
4.00 5.404 3.030 1.910 1.527 1.329 1.208 1.126 1.066 1.021 0.986
6.00 8.106 4.544 2.866 2.291 1.994 1.812 1.689 1.600 1.532 1.479
8.00 10.807 6.059 3.821 3.054 2.659 2.416 2.252 2.133 2.043 1.972
10.00 13.509 7.574 4.776 3.818 3.324 3.020 2.815 2.666 2.554 2.465

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-63

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.4.2.5 I2t curves

The following formulas define this type of curves:

where:
t = Operation time in seconds
Dial = multiplier setting
I = Input current
Itap = Current pickup value
TRESET = reset time in seconds
Table 5-30: Tripping time in seconds for I2t curves
Dial Current (I/Itap)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.444 0.250 0.111 0.063 0.040 0.028 0.020 0.016 0.012 0.010
0.10 4.444 2.500 1.111 0.625 0.400 0.278 0.204 0.156 0.123 0.100
1.00 44.444 25.000 11.111 6.250 4.000 2.778 2.041 1.563 1.235 1.000
10.00 444.444 250.000 111.111 62.500 40.000 27.778 20.408 15.625 12.346 10.000
100.00 4444.444 2500.000 1111.111 625.000 400.000 277.778 204.082 156.250 123.457 100.000
600.00 26666.667 15000.000 6666.667 3750.000 2400.000 1666.667 1224.490 937.500 740.741 600.000

5.4.2.6 Definite time curves

The definite time makes the element trip when the current value is maintained beyond the pickup value during a longer
time period than the set value. The Dial setting allows modifying this time frame from instantaneous to 900 seconds in
steps of 10 ms.

5.4.2.7 Rectifier time curves

Rectifier curves are generated from the following formulas:

where:
T = Operation time (in seconds).
TDM = Multiplying factor
I = Input current
Ipickup = Pickup current
Treset = Reset time (in seconds) assuming a 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated

5-64 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

5.4.2.8 User curves - FlexCurves A/B/C/D

The relay incorporates 4 user curves called User Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are defined by the user.
Each of the four curves has an operation characteristic (operate), defined by 80 points, and a reset characteristic, defined
by 40 points. Each point is defined as a time value for each I/Ipickup value (number of times the pickup current) given on the
table. The user can assign values between 0 and 65.535 seconds in steps of 1 ms.
The following table details the 120 points as well as the characteristic for each of them, and a blank cell where the user can
write the time value when the operation (for I > Ipickup) or the reset (for I < Ipickup) is required,

Table 5-31: User curve characteristics

RESET Time RESET Time OPERATE Time OPERATE Time OPERATE Time OPERATE Time
(xPKP) (s) (xPKP) (s) (xPKP) (s) (xPKP) (s) (xPKP) (s) (xPKP) (s)
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0

The two first columns (40 points) correspond to the RESET curve. The other 4 columns, with 80 points in total, correspond to
the OPERATE curve. The reset characteristic values are between 0 and 0.98, and the operation values are between 1.03
and 20.
The final curve is created by means of a linear interpolation from the points defined by the user. This is a separate process
for the RESET and the OPERATE curve.
The definition of these points is performed in a separate module from the relay, using a configuration program included in
the EnerVista 650 Setup, which incorporates a graphical environment for viewing the curve, thus making it easy for the
user to create it. This module can be accessed from the “Edit Curve” option in the FlexCurve menu, at Setpoint > System
Setup > Flex Curves.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-65

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.4.3 Phase current

The R650 Phase current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
Phase time overcurrent (51PH/51PL)
Phase instantaneous overcurrent (50PH/50PL)
Phase directional overcurrent (67P)
Thermal Model (49)

5.4.3.1 Phase time delayed overcurrent elements – phase high/low (51PH/51PL)

The phase overcurrent element (51P) can be configured in Enervista 650 Setup at Setpoint > Protection Element > Setting
Group X > Phase Current.

Table 5-32: Phase time overcurrent settings

SETPOINT> PROTECTION ELEMENT> SETTING GROUP X > Phase Current >
> Phase TOC High > Phase TOC High 1> Phase TOC High 2 > Phase TOC High 3
> Phase TOC Low > Phase TOC Low 1 > Phase TOC Low 2 > Phase TOC Low 3
setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Input type Input PHASOR(DFT) N/A [PHASOR – RMS]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 x CT [0.5 : 20.00]
Curve shape Curve IEEE Ext Inv N/A [See list of curves]
Time Dial TD Multiplier 1.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A [INSTANTANEOUS – LINEAR]
Voltage Restraint Voltage Restraint DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

The phase overcurrent element (51P) operates in a time period that depends on the applied current and on the set curve.
Possible outputs for the protection element logic are the pickup and tripping signals independent for each phase, and the
general element pickup and tripping signals.
Function: This setting allows enabling or disabling the corresponding directional element.
Input: The phase current input may be selected as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform
RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Pickup Level: This setting allows selecting the current level for the Phase Time Overcurrent element to
operate. The PICKUP setting of the element can be dynamically reduced by a VOLTAGE
RESTRAINT feature
Curve: This setting allows to select the curve that want to be use to operate this element. If the element
Curve is set as Definite Time, then the TD Multiplier setting is used to define both the Operation
time and, in case of selecting Linear reset, the Reset time of the element.
TD Multiplier: This setting allows the curve to be shifted up or down on the time-current characteristic curve.
This allows configuration of the relay depending on network selectivity
Reset: The element reset can be selected between Instantaneous and Linear (timed according to the
corresponding equation).
Voltage Restraint: As mention above, the pickup current magnitude can be dynamically reduced depending on
the existing voltage value. This is done using the Voltage Restraint setting. The pickup current
level is proportional to the phase-to-phase voltage measured according to a coefficient shown
on Figure 5–5:.This is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase
voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve; the pickup level is calculated as ‘Mvr’
times the ‘Pickup’ setting. In the figure, Vpp is the phase-to-phase voltage, and VT Nominal is the
rated voltage set under General settings (refer to section 5.3.1)

5-66 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

Figure 5-12: Voltage restraint characteristics

If the voltage restraint feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the value set in
the Pickup Level setting.

Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the phase
directional elements.

Phase time delayed overcurrent element is an independent Protection element that provides block and Operation signals
for each phase. Block signal status can be monitored through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at Actual >
Status > Protection > Protection Block and Operation Signal status at Actual > Status > Protection > Phase Current
The element incorporates independent block inputs for each phase. Block signals indicate blocked elements by an external
block input. When a particular signal is activated, the element is blocked. These inputs can be configured using Enervista
650 setup at Setpoint>Relay Configuration>Protection elements
Table 5-33: Block signal for the phase time delayed overcurrent element

BLOCK SIGNALS FOR 51P

PH TOC1 HIGH A BLK
PH TOC1 HIGH B BLK
PH TOC1 HIGH C BLK
PH TOC2 HIGH A BLK
PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK
PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK
PH TOC3 HIGH A BLK
PH TOC3 HIGH B BLK
PH TOC3 HIGH C BLK

When the element is blocked, the tripping time counter is reset to 0. This feature allows the use of this input to
instantaneously reset the protection element timing

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-67

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

The following diagram shows the logic scheme followed by high range and low range time overcurrent elements (51PH and 51PL.

Figure 5-13: TOC element logic scheme (A6632F2)

5-68 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

5.4.3.2 Phase instantaneous overcurrent element- phase high/low (50PH/ 50PL)

The Phase instantaneous overcurrent element has a setting range from 0.05 x CT to 20.00 x CT. It can be set as
instantaneous or timed, with the timer selectable between 0.00 and 900 seconds. The input quantities may be chosen as
Fundamental phasor magnitude or RMS magnitude as required by the application. The element incorporates a reset time
selectable between 0 and 900 seconds.
This element also incorporates a block input for disabling the pickup and trip signals. The logic outputs for the element are
the pickup and trip flags, independent for each phase, and general pickup and trip flags.

SETPOINT> PROTECTION ELEMENTS> SETPOINT GROUP X> Phase Current >

> Phase IOC High > Phase IOC High 1> Phase IOC High 2 > Phase IOC High 3
> Phase IOC Low > Phase IOC Low 1 > Phase IOC Low 2 > Phase IOC Low 3
setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Input type Input PHASOR(DFT) N/A [PHASOR – RMS]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 x CT [0.05 : 20.00]
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for these elements.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-69

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

The following figure shows the logic scheme diagram for high range and low range Instantaneous overcurrent elements
(50PH, 50PL).

Figure 5-14: Phase IOC elements logic scheme (A6632F1)

5-70 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

5.4.3.3 Phase directional element (67P)

The Phase directional element (67P) provides independent elements for each phase, and determines the direction of the
current both in permanence and in fault condition.
Its main function is to apply a blocking signal to the overcurrent elements to prevent their operation when the current is
flowing in a certain direction. In order to determine the direction of the current, the element uses phase current values as
operation magnitude, and phase-to-phase voltage values as polarization magnitude. This means that in order to polarize a
phase, we use the phase-to-phase voltage of the other two phases, known as crossed polarization. To increase security for
three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage, a voltage memory feature is incorporated.
This feature remembers the measurement of the polarizing voltage 3 cycles back from the moment when the voltage has
collapsed below the “polarizing voltage threshold”, and uses it to determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid
for a maximum of 3 seconds after the voltage has collapsed. This time is configurable.
The following table describes the phase directional element settings.

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > SETPOINT GROUP X > Phase Current > Phase Directional >
Phase Directional 1> Phase Directional 2 > Phase Directional 3
setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Maximum Torque Angle MTA 45º 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Operation Direction Direction FORWARD N/A [FORWARD – REVERSE]
Block logic Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
Polarization voltage threshold Pol V Threshold 0.10 0.01 x VT [0 : 1.25]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Voltage Memory Time Voltage Memory time 0,00 s [0,00: 3,00]

Function: This setting allows enabling or disabling the corresponding directional element.
MTA: The MTA setting corresponds to the Torque angle, which is the rotation applied to
phase-to-phase crossed voltage.
Direction: This setting allows selecting the area for the directional element to operate, either
forward or reverse.
Block Logic: This setting allows selecting either permission or block, depending on the logic to be
applied upon expiration of voltage memory.
Polarization Voltage Threshold: This is the minimum voltage considered for the direction calculation. Under this setting,
memory voltage is used.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the
phase directional elements.
Voltage Memory Time: This is the time voltage memory is considered as valid and used for direction
calculation when polarization voltage collapses.
Phase directional element is an independent Protection element that provides block and Operation signals for each phase.
These signals can be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at “Actual > Status > Protection
> Phase Current”

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-71

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Table 5-34: Block and operation signals for the phase directional element
BLOCK AND OPERATION FOR 67P
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR1 A OP
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR1 B OP
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR1 C OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR2 A OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR2 B OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR2 C OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR3 A OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR3 B OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR3 C OP

Signals provided by the directional element are, block and operation signals. Signals used to block overcurrent elements
are configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
Operation signals are active when operation and polarization magnitudes meet conditions given by the settings.
Block signals indicate blocked elements by an external block input or by polarization voltage loss after voltage
memorize time elapses. Using the “Block logic” setting, the user can select how the directional element responds in case
of a block. When the “Block” option is selected, the operational signal is not activated in a block condition. When the
“Permission” option is selected, the operation signal is activated in a block condition.
Figure 5-15: Overcurrent elements block configuration by the directional element shows the default configuration for the
phase overcurrent block input. When the “Block logic” setting is set as “Block”, this input is active in case of a block in the
directional element, avoiding any phase overcurrent trip.
When the “Block logic” setting is set as “Permission”, the phase overcurrent element is enabled to trip as the block input is
not active in case of polarization voltage memory expiration.

5-72 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

Figure 5-15: Overcurrent elements block configuration by the directional element

Directional elements can also be blocked with signals coming from other relays, PLCs, or through signals configured in the
relay PLC Editor (Logic configuration tool). The signal used in that case is PHASE DIR BLK INP. Figure 5-16: Directional
element block configuration by input shows an example of the default block configuration of directional elements by
digital input. There is one block signal per input for each setting group.

Figure 5-16: Directional element block configuration by input

The main component of the phase directional element is the angle comparator with two inputs: the operation magnitude
(phase current) and the polarization magnitude (phase-to-phase voltage rotated the angle set in MTA setting), which is the
torque angle.
The Polarization type used in the directional element is crossed, this means that in case of a fault in phase A, the Operation
magnitude is Ia, and the polarization magnitude is Vbc, rotated by the torque angle. In case of a fault in phase B, the
operation magnitude is Ib, and the polarization magnitude is Vca rotated by the torque angle. Finally, in case of a fault in
phase C, the operation magnitudes is Ic, and Vab.

Table 5-35: Operation and polarization magnitudes for directional units

POLARIZING SIGNAL VPOL
PHASE OPERATING SIGNAL ABC PHASE SEQUENCE ACB PHASE SEQUENCE
A IA angle VBC angle x 1 MTA VCB angle x 1 MTA
B IB angle VCA angle x 1 MTA VAC angle x 1 MTA
C IC angle VAB angle x 1 MTA VBA angle x 1 MTA

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-73

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

The polarization diagram is as follows:

Figure 5-17: Polarization diagram

The diagram shows a fault in phase A, therefore the Operation magnitude is IA, the polarization magnitude is VBC, which
has been rotated the torque angle set as MTA. Positive angles are considered as counter clockwise rotations, and negative
angles clockwise rotations. Direction is considered to be forward when the fault current is inside an arc of ±90º to both
sides of the polarization voltage. In the directional element settings there is a Direction setting that allows to select in
which area the element operation is allowed, either forward or reverse. Operation areas include a safety zone of 5º to each
side of the cone. This safety cone is applied when the operation direction calculation is performed from initial block
conditions. When we go from a non-trip area to a trip area, the safety cone is considered.When going from a trip area to a
non-trip area, this cone is not considered, and the whole area is operative. This safety cone is always located in the
operation area, both in forward and reverse cases.
NOTE: In situations where a current inversion is produced during a fault, the phase directional element requires a period of
time to establish the blocking signal. This time is approximately 20 ms. Certain instantaneous overcurrent elements can be
activated before receiving the blocking signal from the directional element. In cases where these situations can be
expected, we recommend to add a 50ms delay to IOC elements.

5-74 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

The following figure shows the logic scheme for the phase directional element.

Figure 5-18: Directional element logic scheme (A6632F3)

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-75

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.4.3.4 Thermal model element (49)

Thermal model is a protection element that calculates the thermal heating generated as a result of the flowing current,
and prevents this heating from causing damage to the protected equipment. In order to calculate the tripping time, the
following equation is used:

Where,
t is the heating/cooling time constant.
I’ is the ratio current/pickup
Table 5-36: Thermal model element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X Phase Current > Thermal Model >
Thermal Model 1> Thermal Model 2 > Thermal Model 3
setting Description Name Default Step Range
Value
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Heating time constant Heat Time Constant 6.0 0.1 min [3.0 : 600.0]
Cooling time constant Cool Time Constant 2.00 0.01 times Heat Time [1.00 : 6.00]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 x CT [0.05 : 20.00]
Alarm level Alarm Level 80.0 0.1 % [1.0 : 110.0]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

The cooling constant is given in times the heating constant.

The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the thermal model elements.

5-76 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

5.4.4 Neutral current

The Neutral Current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
• Neutral time overcurrent (51N)
• Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (50N)
• Neutral directional element (67N)

5.4.4.1 Neutral time-delayed overcurrent element (51N)

Neutral TOC is a neutral time delayed overcurrent protection element. This element uses as the input quantity the neutral
current, calculated from the phase currents. The trip can be timed by a curve selectable by setting. The reset can be
instantaneous or linear.
Table 5-37: Neutral TOC element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Neutral Current > Neutral TOC
Neutral TOC 1> Neutral TOC 2 > Neutral TOC 3
setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 x CT [0.05 : 20.00]
Curve shape Curve IEEE Ext Inv N/A [See list of curves]
Time Dial TD Multiplier 1.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A [INSTANTANEOUS – LINEAR]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element.

5.4.4.2 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element (50N)

This function can be used as an instantaneous element or as a definite time element. The element responds to the neutral
current, calculated from phase currents.

Table 5-38: Neutral IOC element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Neutral Current > Neutral IOC
Neutral IOC 1> Neutral IOC 2 > Neutral IOC 3
setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 x CT [0.05 : 20.00]
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element.

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-77

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

The following figure shows the logic scheme for the neutral Instantaneous overcurrent element.

Figure 5-19: LOGIC SCHEME FOR NEUTRAL IOC element

5-78 R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER GEK-131023B

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

5.4.4.3 Neutral directional element (67N)

The Neutral directional element is used for supervising the neutral (3I0) overcurrent elements. This element can be set to
use either the neutral voltage, or the polarization current measured by the 5th current input (Ip), or both as polarization
magnitude.

Table 5-39: 67N element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Neutral Current > Neutral Directional >
Neutral Directional 1> Neutral Directional 2 > Neutral Directional 3
setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Maximum Torque Angle MTA -45 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Operation Direction Direction FORWARD N/A [FORWARD – REVERSE]
Polarization type Polarization VO N/A [V0 – IP – V0+IP – V0*IP ]
Block logic type Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
Polarization voltage threshold Pol V Threshold 0.10 0.01 x VT [0.00 : 1.25]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

Settings for this element are:

Maximum Torque Angle (MTA): Angle used to rotate the polarization voltage. Positive angles are counter clockwise
rotations, and negative angles are clockwise rotations. The polarization magnitude,
once rotated, defines the MTA line. Vn rotated by this angle points to the semi plane
that corresponds to a Reverse fault. -Vn rotated this angle points to the semi plane
that corresponds to a Forward fault. A typical setting can be –45º.
Directional element direction (Direction): This setting indicates the Direction for which the element allows a trip.
Depending on this setting, the element is activated for faults in the forward
direction, or ion the reverse direction, allowing its use in tripping or blocking
schemes. Possible options for this setting are FORWARD and REVERSE.
Polarization type (Polarization): This setting indicates the type of Polarization to be used. The relay can use voltage
polarization (V0), and/or current polarization (Ip). Possible setting values are:
V0 Voltage polarization
Ip Current polarization
V0 + Ip Voltage or current polarization. This allows the element to
operate when any of the polarization magnitudes allow
operation.
V0 * Ip Voltage and current polarization. This allows the element to
operate when both polarization magnitudes allow operation.
If the selected polarization type is V0+Ip, then the relay operates when any of the
polarization magnitudes indicate the selected direction in the Direction setting.
If the selected polarization type is V0*Ip, then the relay only operates when both
polarization magnitudes indicate the selected direction in the Direction setting.
Polarization Voltage Threshold This is the minimum voltage considered for the direction calculation. Under this
setting, the element is blocked.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for
this elements.
The Neutral directional element is an independent Protection element that provides Block and Operation signals. These
signals can be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at “Actual > Status > Protection >
Neutral Current”

GEK-131023B R650 RECLOSER CONTROLLER 5-79

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

67N Block (NEUTRAL DIR BLOCK): It indicates that the element is blocked by digital input or because the Operation
magnitude (In current), or the Polarization magnitude (Vn voltage and/or Ip current) level is too low.
67N Operation (NEUTRAL DIR OP): It indicates that the directional element is giving permission, that the angle relations
between the operation magnitude and the polarization magnitude are met, according to the set conditions, or in case of
having selected Permission in the Block Logic setting, it indicates that the element allows operation under block conditions.
Table 5-40: Signals for the neutral directional element
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL
NEUTRAL DIR1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP
NEUTRAL DIR2 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR2 OP
NEUTRAL DIR3 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR3 OP

5.4.4.4 Voltage polarization operation principles

Operation Magnitude: In = 3·Io, calculated from the phase currents.
Polarization Magnitude: -3V0. Calculated from the phase voltages or measured at the input terminals (A11, A12).The
relay measures 3V0 and rotates 180º internally to obtain -3V0.

shows the operation of the zero sequence polarization, 3V0, in case of an AG fault. In this case, the polarization magnitude
3V0 can be calculated from the three phase voltage values, or measured through the fourth voltage input (Vx). In this last
case, the voltage transformer